Skip to main content

Full text of "The Karma-Mimamsa"

See other formats


•  co 

18 

-in 


S 


;CD 
loo 


THE  HERITAGE  OF  INDIA 


,  . 

P  ,  ., 
manors 


The  Right  Reverend  V.  S.  Azariah, 

Bishop  of  Dornakal. 
j    N   Farquhar>  M  A>>  D>Litt.  (Oxon.) 


Already  published. 

The  Heart  of  Buddhism.     K.  J.  SAUNDERS,  M.A. 

Asoka.    REV.  J.  M.  MACPHAIL,  M.A.,  M.D. 

Indian  Painting.     PRINCIPAL  PERCY  BROWN,  Calcutta. 

Kanarese  Literature.    REV.  E.  P.  RICE,  B.A. 

The   Sarhkhya   System.    A.   BERRIEDALE   KEITH,   D.C.L., 

D.Litt. 

Psalms  of  Maratha  Saints.     NICOL  MACNICOL,  M.A.,  D.Litt. 
A  History  of  Hindi  Literature.     REV.  F.  E.  KEAY,  M.A. 
Hymns   of    the   Tamil    Saivite    Saints.      KINGSBURY    and 

PHILLIPS. 


Subjects  proposed  and  •volumes  tinder  preparation. 

SANSKRIT  AND  PALI  LITERATURE. 

Hymns  from  the  Vedas.     Prof.  A.  A.  MACDONELL,  Oxford. 
Anthology  of  Mahayana  Literature.    Prof.  L.  DE  LA  VALLE 

POUSSIN,  Ghent. 
Selections    from    the    Upanisads.     F.   J.    WESTERN,   M.A., 

Delhi. 

Scenes  from  the  Ramaya_na._ 
Selections  from  the  Mahabharata. 

THE  PHILOSOPHIES. 

An  Introduction  to  Hindu  Philosophy.    J.  N.  FARQUHAR, 

and  JOHN  McKENZiE,  M.A.,  Bombay. 
The  Philosophy  of  the  Upanisads. 
Sankara's  Vedanta.    A.  K.  SHARMA,  M.A,,  Patiala 
Ramanuja's  Vedanta. 
The  Buddhist  System. 

FINE  ART^AND  MUSIC. 

Indian  Architecture.    R.  L.  EWING,  B.A.,  Madras, 
Indian  Sculpture. 


The  Minor  Arts.    Principal  PERCY  BROWN,  Calcutta. 
Indian  Coins.    C.  J.  BROWN,  M.A.  (Oxon.). 

BIOGRAPHIES  OF  EMINENT  INDIANS. 

Gautama  Buddha.    K.  J.  SAUNDERS,  M.A.,  Rangoon. 

Ramanuja. 

Akbar.    F.  V.  SLACK,  M.A.,  Calcutta. 

Tulsi  Das. 

Rabindranath  Tagore.     E.  J.  THOMPSON,  M.A.,  Bankura. 

VERNACULAR  LITERATURE. 

The  Kurral.     H.  A.  POPLEY,  B.A.,  Erode. 

Hymns  of  the  Alvars.     J.  S.  M.  HOOPER,  M.A.,  Madras. 

Tulsi  Das  in  Miniature.     G.  J.  DANN,  M.A.,  Patna. 

Hymns  of  Bengali  Singers.     E.  J.  THOMPSON,  M.A.,  Bankura. 

Kanarese  Hymns.     Miss  BUTLER,  Bangalore. 

HISTORIES  OF  VERNACULAR  LITERATURE. 

Bengali.     C.  S.  PATERSON,  M.A.,  Calcutta. 

Gujaratl.     R.  H.  Bo  YD,  M.A.,  Ahmadabad. 

Marathi.     NICOL  MACNICOL,  M.A.,  D.Litt.,  Poona. 

Tamil.     FRANCIS  KINGSBURY,  B.A.,  Bangalore. 

Telugu.      P.    CHENCHIAH,     M.A.,     Madras,      and     RAJA 

BHUJANGA  RAO,  Ellore. 

Malayalam.    T.  K.  JOSEPH,  B.A.,  L.T.,  Trivandrum. 
Sinhalese. 
Urdu.    B.  GHOSH AL,  M.A.,  Bhopal. 

NOTABLE  INDIAN  PEOPLES. 

The  Rajputs. 

The  Syrian  Christians.     K.  C.  MAMMEN  MAPILLAI,  Alleppey. 

The  Sikhs. 

VARIOUS. 

Modern  Folk  Tales.      W.  NORMAN    BROWN,  M.A.,   Ph.D., 

Philadelphia. 

Indian  Village  Government. 

Poems  by  Indian  Women.     MRS.  N.  MACNICOL,  Poona. 
Classical  Sanskrit  Literature. 

Indian  Temple  Legends.     K.  T.  PAUL,  B.A.,  Calcutta. 
Indian  Astronomy  and  Chronology.     DEWAN  BAHADUR  L.  D. 

SWAMIKANNU  PILLAI,  Madras. 


EDITORIAL  PREFACE 

"  Finally,  brethren,  whatsoever  things  are 
true,  whatsoever  things  are  honourable,  whatso 
ever  things  are  just,  whatsoever  things  are  pure, 
whatsoever  things  are  lovely,  whatsoever  things 
are  of  good  report  ;  if  there  be  any  virtue,  and 
if  there  be  any  praise,  think  on  these  things." 

No  section  of  the  population  of  India  can  afford  to 
neglect  her  ancient  heritage.  In  her  literature,  philosophy, 
art,  and  regulated  life  there  is  much  that  is  worthless,  much 
also  that  is  distinctly  unhealthy;  yet  the  treasures  of 
knowledge,  wisdom,  and  beauty  which  they  contain  are  too 
precious  to  be  lost.  Every  citizen  of  India  needs  to  use 
them,  if  he  is  to  be  a  cultured  modern  Indian.  This  is  as 
true  of  the  Christian,  the  Muslim,  the  Zoroastrian  as  of  the 
Hindu.  But,  while  the  heritage  of  India  has  been  largely- 
explored  by  scholars,  and  the  results  of  their  toil  are  laid 
out  for  us  in  their  books,  they  cannot  be  said  to  be  really 
available  for  the  ordinary  man.  The  volumes  are  in  most 
cases  expensive,  and  are  often  technical  and  difficult. 
Hence  this  series  of  cheap  books  has  been  planned  by  a 
group  of  Christian  men,  in  order  that  every  educated 
Indian,  whether  rich  or  poor,  may  be  able  to  find  his  way 
into  the  treasures  of  India's  past.  Many  Europeans,  both 
in  India  and  elsewhere,  will  doubtless  be  glad  to  use  the 
series. 

The  utmost  care  is  being  taken  by  the  General  Editors 
in  selecting  writers,  and  in  passing  manuscripts  for  the 
press.  To  every  book  two  tests  are  rigidly  applied :  every 
thing  must  be  scholarly,  and  everything  must  be  sympathetic. 
The  purpose  is  to  bring  the  best  out  of  the  ancient 
treasuries,  so  that  it  may  be  known,  enjoyed,  and  used. 


THE    M/.^. 

KARMA-MiMAMSA 


BY 


A.  BERRIEDALE  KEITH,  D.C.L.,  D.LITT. 

(of  the  Inner  Temple  Barrister-at-Law,  Regius  Professor  of  Sanskrit 
and  Comparative  Philology  at  the  University  of  Edinburgh) 

AUTHOR  OF  "THE  SAMKHYA  SYSTEM,"  ETC. 


.  3 


ASSOCIATION   PRESS 
5,  RUSSELL   STREET,  CALCUTTA 

LONDON:    OXFORD  UNIVERSITY   PRESS 

NEW    YORK,    TORONTO,    MELBOURNE, 

BOMBAY,  CALCUTTA  AND  MADRAS 

1921 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

PREFACE 

I.    THE  DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY   OF 

THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA  . .  . .  . .  . .        6 

The  Origin  of  the  System. — The  Mirnamsa  Sutra. — 

The  Vrttikara. — Prabhakara  and  Kumarila. — Later 

Writers. — Other  Literary  Sources. 

II.    THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE   ..  ..  ..       17 

The  Validity  of  Apprehension. — Mode  of  Appre 
hension  of  Cognition. — The  Forms  of  Cognition. — 
Perception. — Inference. — Comparison. — Presumption. 
— Negation. — Scripture  and  Verbal  Testimony. 

III.    THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  ..  ..  ..44 

The  Refutation  of  Buddhist  Nihilism  and  Idealism. 
— The  Categories  of  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila. — 
Substance. — Quality. — Action  or  Motion. — Generality. 
— Inherence. — Similarity. — Cause. — Non-existence. 

IV.    GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER     ..  ..  ..61 

The  Refutation  of  the  Doctrine  of  Creation.— The 
Doctrine  of  the  Soul. — The  Destiny  of  Man. — The 
Purpose  of  Sacrifice. 

V.    THE  RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION  . .       79 

The  Authority  of  Scripture. — The  Brahmanas  as 
Vidhi,  Arthavada,  and  Namadheya. — The  Mantras. 
— Smrtis,  Vedangas,  Grammar,  and  Custom. — The 
Classes  of  Actions  enjoined. — Originating  Injunc 
tions. — Injunctions  of  Application. — Injunctions  of 
Performance. -Injunctions  of  Qualification.— Original, 
Restrictive,  and  Limiting  Injunctions. — Prohibitions 
and  Exceptions. — Transfer  and  Modification  of 
Details. — Repetition  and  Option. 

VI.    THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW..  ..  ..       97 

The  Mimamsa  and  the  Law  Schools. — The  Inter 
pretation  of  Injunctions. — Religious  and  Secular 
Factors  in  Ownership. — Inheritance  and  Partition. — 
Adoption  and  Partnership. — Criminal  Law  and  the 
Law  of  Evidence. 

INDEX  . ;  108 


PRINTED  AT 

THE   WESLEYAN   MISSION  PRESS, 
MYSORE  CITY. 


I 

THE    DEVELOPMENT   AND    LITERARY 
HISTORY  OF  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

NOT  rarely  in  the  Brahmanas,  especially  in  later  texts  like 
the  Kausttaki,  the  term  Mimarhsa  occurs  as  the  designation 
of  a  discussion  on  some  point  of  ritual  practise.  The 
sacrifice  left  innumerable  opportunities  for  divergence 
of  usage  in  detail,  and  the  texts  decide  in  favour  of  one  or 
the  other  alternative,  on  the  strength  of  the  reasons-  familiar 
to  the  Brahmanas,  in  special  the  symbolical  significance 
attaching  to  the  action  recommended.  There  is  a  vital 
difference  between  this  form  of  Mimamsa  and  that  of  the 
classical  Karma-Mimarhsa  school,  in  the  fact  that  in  the 
former  the  appeal  to  authority,  and  the  necessity  of 
reconciling  apparent  discrepancies  of  authority,  are  entirely 
lacking.  But  the  tendency  to  surrender  judgment  in  favour 
of  tradition  may  be  traced  in  the  care  with  which  in  the 
Satapatha  and  the  Kausitaki  Brahmanas  the  name  of  the 
teacher  is  adduced  in  support  of  the  doctrines  expounded  ; 
in  the  older  style  the  reasonings  stand  by  themselves, 
commended  by  their  intrinsic  value. 

The  process  by  which  the  Brahmanas  came  to  be  regard 
ed  as  texts  of  incontrovertible  accuracy,  and  speculation  on 
the  sacrifice  ceased  to  be  independent,  cannot  now  be  traced  in 
detail.  The  account  of  the  sacrifices  given  in  these  texts, 
supplemented  by  the  collections  of  Mantras  in  the  Samhitas 
of  the  various  schools,  would,  obviously,  never  have  sufficed 
to  enable  priests  to  carry  out  the  sacrifices,  and  there  must 
have  been  a  full  and  precise  oral  tradition  regarding  the 
mode  in  which  the  sacrifices,  which  formed  the  subjects  of 
the  mystical  speculations  of  the  Brahmanas,  were  to  be 
performed.  This  tradition,  however,  in  the  course  of  time 


2  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

seems  to  have  become  obscured,  just  as  the  tradition  of  the 
interpretation  of  the  Mantras  fell  into  confusion,  and  in  its 
place  in  some  degree  supervened  an  attempt,  on  the  ground 
of  reasoning,  to  deduce  from  the  Sarhhitas  and  the  Brah 
manas,  taken  together,  rules  for  the  regulation  of  the 
performance  of  the  offerings.  The  difficulties  of  such  a 
course  were  considerable;  there  are  real  divergences  between 
the  Samhitas  and  the  Brahmanas,  which  we  may  justly 
attribute  to  change  of  ritual,  but  which  in  the  opinion  of 
the  priests  admitted  of  other  explanations.  Thus,  in  some 
cases,  the  order  of  the  Mantras  is  patently  different  from 
the  order  of  actions  contemplated  in  the  Brahmanas,  a 
divergence  which  the  new  MImamsa  decided  in  favour  of 
the  order  of  the  Mantras  on  the  ground  that,  as  they  were 
recited  in  the  sacrifice  they  were  more  directly  connected 
with  the  sacrifice  than  the  Brahmanas,  which  were  not 
immediately  employed  in  the  offering.  With  more  plausi 
bility,  the  new  doctrine  held  that  if  a  Brahmana  mentioned 
an  action  out  of  its  natural  order,  such  as  the  cooking  of  the 
rice  grains  before  the  husking,  it  was  nevertheless  to  be 
assumed  that  the  normal  sequence  was  to  be  followed. 
More  legitimately  still,  the  new  science  devoted  itself  to  such 
problems  as  the  determination  of  the  person  by  whom  the 
several  actions  enjoined,  without  specification  of  the  actor, 
fell  to  be  performed;  the  connection  as  principal  and 
subordinate  of  the  many  details  of  the  offering  ;  and  the 
precise  mode  of  performance  of  the  Vikrtis,  or  derivative 
forms  of  the  main  sacrifices,  the  particulars  of  which  are 
seldom  adequately  indicated  in  the  sacred  texts. 

The  antiquity  of  the  new  science  is  vouched  for  by  the 
Dharma  Sutras.  Apastamba  in  two  passages1  disposes  of 
contested  points  by  the  authority  of  those  who  know  the 
Nyaya,  a  term  which  is  the  early  designation  of  the  Karma- 
Mimarhsa  and  persists  through  its  history  in  its  generic 
sense  of  "  reasoning,"  while  the  Nyaya  philosophy  proper 
borrows  it,  and  applies  it  more  specifically  to  denote  the 
syllogism.  What  is  still  more  convincing  is  that  Apastamba 

1  Biihlcr,  Sacred  Books  of  the  East,  II,  xxviii,  xxix  ;  XXV, 
xlvii,  Hi. 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  3 

uses  arguments  which  are  to  be  found  in  the  Mimamsa 
Sutra ;  thus  he  maintains  that  no  text  can  be  inferred  from 
a  custom  for  which  a  secular  motive  is  apparent,  and  that  a 
revealed  text  has  superior  validity  to  a  custom  whence  a 
text  might  be  inferred.  The  corresponding  rules  in  the 
Mimdmsa  Sutra  (I,  3,  3-4)  do  not  textually  agree,  and  we 
may  fairly  conclude  that  at  this  date,  probably  not  later 
than  the  middle  of  the  third  century  B.C.,  the  Sutra  did  not 
exist  in  its  present  form,  but  it  is  plain  that  the  science 
itself  was  in  full  vogue,  and  a  Mimamsnka  appears  to  have 
been  deemed  a  necessary  member  of  a  Parisad.  The 
influence  of  this  discipline  can  plainly  be  discerned  in  the 
existing  Sutra  texts;  the  works  of  Asvalayana,  Sankhayana, 
Apastamba,  Hiranyakesin,  Latyayana,  and  Drahyayana 
have  been  composed  under  its  influence,  and  the  same  con 
sideration  applies  even  to  texts  like  those  of  the  Baudhayana 
and  Manava  schools,  which  show  greater  affinities  to  the 
Brahmana  style.  We  need  not,  of  course,  assume  that  the 
old  sacrificial  tradition  was  entirely  lost,  but  we  may  be 
certain  that  it  has  been  largely  transformed  in  the  process 
of  remodelling. 

Simultaneously  with  the  remodelling  of  the  Sutras,  there 
must  have  proceeded  the  definition  of  the  rules  of  interpre 
tation  until  they  were  finally  codified  in  the  Ml-mamsa 
Sutra,1  which  passes  under  the  name  of  Jaimini,  but  the 
details  of  this  process  must  remain  unknown  to  us.  What 
is  certain  is  that  the  Mlmamsd  Sutra  presupposes  a  long 
history  of  discussion,  and  that  its  aphorisms,  which  often 
assume,  without  expressing,  general  rules  of  interpretation, 
deal  largely  with  difficulties  affecting  individual  Vedic 
texts,  which  had  long  been  the  subject  of  dispute. 
This  characteristic  is  shown  clearly  in  the  mode  of 
discussion  followed  in  the  text;  the  essential  subdivision 
is  the  Adhikarana,  which,  according  to  the  school,  is  to 
be  deemed  to  fall  into  five  parts;  these  Madhava  reckons 
as  the  subject  of  investigation  (visaya),  the  doubt 
(samsaya) ,  the  first  or  prima  facie  view  (purvapaksa) ,  the 

1  Edited,  Bibliothecalndica,  1873-1889  ;  trans,  of  Adhyayas  I-III, 
by  Gafiganatha  Jha,  Sacred  Books  of  the  Hindus,  vol,  X, 


4  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

answer  or  demonstrated  conclusion  (siddhdnta) ,  and  the 
relevance  of  the  topic  (samgati),  but  the  last  head  is  else 
where  reckoned  as  the  third,  and  a  more  natural  division1 
omits  it,  and  regards  as  the  fourth  and  fifth  members  the 
answer  (uttarapaksa),  and  the  conclusion  (nirnaya).  Thus 
in  the  first  Sutra  of  the  text  there  are  two  Adhikaranas;  is 
the  study  of  the  Veda  necessary  for  the  three  upper  castes, 
and  is  Dharma  a  proper  subject  of  study  ?  The  latter  alone 
needs  full  discussion,  the  reply  to  the  former  being  self- 
evident.  The  subject  then  is  formed  by  the  two  Vedic  pre 
cepts,  "  One  should  study  the  Veda,"  and  "  One  should  per 
form  the  final  bath  after  studying  the  Veda."  The  doubt  is 
whether  one  should,  after  learning  the  Vedic  text,  perform 
the  bath  and  end  one's  studentship,  or  remain  longer  with 
the  teacher  to  study  Dharma.  The  priina  facie  view  is  that 
the  bath  should  follow  immediately  on  the  learning  of  the 
text,  but  the  reply  is  that  real  study  of  the  Veda  is  not 
satisfied  by  mere  reading  of  the  text,  and  the  conclusion, 
therefore,  is  that  the  final  bath  is  to  be  postponed  for  a  time 
in  order  that  the  student  may  complete  his  learning  of  the 
text  by  a  study  of  Dharma.  Of  all  this,  however,  the  Sutra 
itself  has  nothing,  consisting  merely  of  the  words,  "  Now, 
therefore,  an  enquiry  into  Dharma,"  and,  though  in  some 
cases  there  is  more  full  development  of  an  Adhikarana,  it 
is  to  the  commentators  that  we  must  look  for  enlightenment 
on  the  exact  issues  in  dispute.  It  is  not,  of  course,  to  be 
supposed  that  at  any  time  the  Sutra  was  handed  down 
without  oral  explanation,  but,  as  usual,  the  authentic  version 
was  early  obscured. 

Of  these  Adhikaranas  there  are  in  the  Sutra  in  Madhava's 
reckoning  about  915,  divided  into  twelve  books  with  sixty 
Padas,  the  third,  sixth,  and  tenth  having  eight  each  in  lieu 
of  the  normal  four,  and  2,652  aphorisms  (2,742  in  another 
reckoning).  Jaimini  is  the  chief  authority  cited,  but  men 
tion  is  made  also  of  other  names,  such  as  those  of  Badari, 
Atreya,  and  Badarayana,  who  occur  also  in  the  Vedanta 
Siitra,  and  of  Labukayana,  Aitasayana,  etc.  Who  Jaimini 
was  we  cannot  say.  A  Jaimini  is  credited  with  the  author- 

1  Cowell  in  Colcbrookc,  Essays  I,  326, 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  5 

ship  of  a  Srauta  and  a  Grhya  Sutra,  and  the  name  occurs 
in  lists  of  doubtful  authenticity  in  the  Asvalayana  and 
Sdiikhdyana  Grhya  Sutras;  a  Jaiminiya  Samhitd  and  a 
Jaiminiya  Brdhmana  of  the  Sdma  Veda  are  extant.  As 
an  authority  on  philosophy  Jaimini  appears  in  the 
Vedanta  Sutra  and  often  in  later  works,1  but  it  is  significant 
that,  while  it  is  possible  that  the  Mahdbhdrata  recognises 
the  existence  of  the  Mimamsa  it  does  not  refer  to  Jaimini 
as  a  philosopher,  but  merely  as  an  ancient  sage.2  Neither 
Buddhist  or  Jain  literature  throws  light  on  his  personality 
or  date,  and  the  period  of  the  Sutra  can  be  determined, 
therefore,  merely  on  grounds  of  comparison  of  its  contents 
with  those  of  other  works. 

It  is  probable  that  the  Mimdrhsd  Sutra  is  the  earliest  of 
the  six  Darsanas  preserved  to  us.  The  Yoga  Sutra  is  not 
an  early  work;  it  seems  to  recognise  the  Vijnanavada  school 
of  Buddhism,  which,  in  all  probability,  belongs  to  the 
fourth  century  A.D.,  and  the  popular  identification  of 
Patanjali  with  the  author  of  the  Mahdbhdsya  is  clearly  unten 
able.3  The  lateness  of  the  Sdrhkhya  Sutra  is  admitted, 
and  the  theory  that  its  contents  include  early  matter  has 
been  controverted.  The  Vaisesika  Sutra  has  no  point  of 
contact  with  the  Mimamsa  such  as  would  render  any  con 
clusion  possible,  but  the  Nydya  Sutra  (II,  1,61)  is  familiar 
with  the  Mimamsa  terminology,  and  it  is  improbable  that, 
had  the  Nydya  existed  before  the  Mimdrhsd  Siltra  took  form, 
it  would  have  been  ignored  by  the  latter  as  it  is.  The 
relation  to  the  Vedanta  Sutra  is  less  clear;  the  mention 
of  Jaimini  and  Badarayana  in  both  texts  affords  some 
ground  for  the  view  that  the  two  works  were  simultaneously 
redacted,  but  this  conclusion  is  by  no  means  assured. 
We  have  no  valid  reason  for  assuming  that  the  Sutras  were 
actually  redacted  by  Jaimini  and  Badarayana  themselves, 

1  His  death,  caused  by  an  elephant,  is  recorded  in  Pancatantra 
II,  34,  but  not  in  the  Tantrakhyayika.  The  name  is  strange,  but  is 
ignored  in  Panini  and  the  Mahdbhdsya,  which,  however,  knows  of 
Mimarhsakas,  probably  adherents  of  this  school  (Indische  Studien, 
XIII,  455,  466). 

*  Hopkins,  Great  Epic  of  India,  p.  97. 

8  Sdmkhya  System,  pp.  56,  57. 


6  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

and,  unless  this  is  established,  the  argument  for  contempor 
aneity  is  invalid.  It  is  true  that  it  is  impossible  to  deduce 
from  the  style  of  the  Mimamsa  as  Purva-MImamsa  a 
relation  of  temporal  priority  for  Jaimini's  work;  the 
Mimamsa  is  prior  to  the  Vedanta  because  it  deals  with  the 
sacred  rites,  the  knowledge  of  which,  in  the  view  of  one 
school  of  Vedanta,  is  an  indispensable  preliminary  to  the 
knowledge  of  the  absolute,  though  Sarhkara  declines  to 
accept  this  view  and  insists  instead  on  the  diverse  character  of 
the  ends  of  the  two  disciplines,  which  renders  it  impossible 
to  treat  the  former  as  the  normal  or  necessary  prelude  to  the 
latter.1  Nonetheless  it  remains  true  that  we  must  assume 
that  the  Mimamsa  as  a  science  developed  before  the  Vedanta.2 
The  former  was  plainly  necessitated  by  the  development  of 
the  sacrificial  ritual  with  which  it  is  immediately  connected, 
and  it  serves  an  important  practical  end;  the  latter  is  proof 
of  the  growth  of  a  philosophical  spirit,  which  sought  to 
comprehend  as  a  whole  the  extremely  varied  speculations 
which  are  scattered  in  the  Aranyakas  and  Upanisads. 
While,  of  course,  it  is  not  impossible  that  the  redaction  of 
the  two  Sutras  was  contemporaneous,  despite  the  earlier 
development  of  the  Mimamsa,  the  probability  surely  lies  in 
favour  of  the  view  that  the  Mimamsa  Sutra  was  redacted 
first  and  served  as  a  model  for  the  other  schools. 

Even  if  this  view  is  accepted,  it  remains  difficult  to 
assign  any  definite  date  to  the  Sutra.  It  contains  no 
certain  reference  to  Buddhist  tenets  of  any  kind,  for  the 
term  buddha,  in  I,  2,  33,  has  not  this  signification,  and  we 
need  not  with  Kumarila  read  a  reference  to  Buddhism  into 
I,  3,  5,  and^.  The  Vedanta  Sutra  is  of  uncertain  date  ;  if 
we  believe  Sarhkara,  it  criticises  (II,  2,  28-32)  the  Vijnana- 
vada  school  of  Buddhism,  but  this  doctrine  is  probably 
wrong3  and  we  need  see  only  a  reference  to  the  Sunyavada 
of  Nagarjuna.  The  date  of  this  school  is  uncertain  ;  if  we 
accept  the  opinion  that  it  was  not  enunciated  before 
Nagarjuna  in  such  a  manner  as  to  invite  criticism  in  the 

1  Deussen,  Vedanta,  ch.  I. 

2  Thibaut,  S.B.E.,  XXXIV,  ix  ff . 

3  Jacobi,  J.A.O.S.,   XXXI,    Iff;    Keith,  J.R.A.S.,   1914,   pp. 
1091  ff  ;  see  below,  pp.  46,  47. 


Veddnta  Sutra,  that  work  cannot  be  earlier  than  the  third 
century  A.D.,  for  Aryadeva,  Nagarjuna's  contemporary, 
refers  to  the  zodiacal  signs  and  the  week-days,  which  were 
not  known  in  India  until  that  epoch.  But  it  is  possible 
that  the  Sunyavada,  which  can  be  recognised  in  Asvaghosa, 
was  of  older  fame  than  Nagarjuna,  though  on  the  whole  it  is 
more  likely  than  not  that  it  was  the  dialectical  ability  of 
that  teacher  which  made  the  doctrine  the  object  of  Vedantic 
confutation.  It  is,  then,  a  plausible  conclusion  that  the 
Mimamsd  Sutra  does  not  date  after  200  A.D.,  but  that  it  is 
probably  not  much  earlier,  since  otherwise  it  would  have 
been  natural  to  find  in  the  Mahdbhdrata  some  reference  to 
it  and  to  its  author. 

As  we  have  seen,  the  Sutra  must  from  the  first  have  been 
accompanied  by  a  comment,  which  in  course  of  time  was  lost 
or  became  defective.  The  first  commentator  of  whom  we 
have  certain  knowledge  is  a  Vrttikara,  from  whose  work  a 
long  extract  is  made  in  the  Bhdsya  of  Sabarasvamin  on 
Mimdrhsd  Sutra,  I,  1,  5,  in  which  the  author  attacks  and 
refutes  Buddhist  views.  If  we  believe  Kumarila,  the  dis 
cussion  is  directed  in  part  against  the  Vijnanavada  school, 
in  part  against  the  Sunyavada,  but  in  this  case  we  have 
every  reason  to  distrust  his  assertion,  for,  plainly  by  error, 
he  ascribes  the  major  portion  of  the  discussion  to  Sabara 
svamin,  and  not  to  the  Vrttikara.  It  is,  therefore,  not 
improbable  that  he  is  also  in  error  in  finding  any  reference 
to  the  Vijnanavada,  for  the  passage  seems  to  deal  with  one 
topic  only,  and  that  the  Sunyavada.  It  follows,  accordingly, 
that  the  date  of  the  Vrttikara  was  probably  not  later  than 
the  fourth  century  A.D.,  since,  had  he  lived  later,  he  would 
hardly  have  omitted  an  explicit  discussion  of  the  tenets  of 
the  idealistic  school  of  Buddhism. 

The  name  of  the  Vrttikara  is  uncertain.  The  conjecture1 
that  he  was  Bhavadasa,  mentioned  in  one  place  by  Kumarila, 
may  be  dismissed  as  wholly  without  support.  The  current 
opinion  makes  him  to  be  Upavarsa,  who,  we  know  from  Sarh- 
kara  (Veddnta  Sutra,  III,  3,  53)  wrote  on  both  the  texts.  To 
this  the  objection  has  been  brought  that  in  the  passage  cited 

1  Gaftganatha  Jh&,  trans,  of  Slokavdrttika,  p.  116. 


8  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

from  the  Vrttikara  by  Sabarasvamin  there  is  a  reference  to 
Upavarsa  with  the  epithet  Bhagavat,  implying  that  he  was 
in  the  eyes  of  the  Vrttikara  an  author  of  venerable  authority. 
It  is  probable,  however,  that  the  citation  from  the  Vrttikara 
is  only  a  resume,1  not  a  verbatim  quotation,  and  that  Sabara- 
svamin  is  responsible  for  the  reference1  to  Upavarsa,  the 
Vrttikara's  proper  name,  and  for  this  view  support  may  be 
derived  from  the  mode  in  which  the  Vrttikara  and  Upavarsa 
are  referred  to  by  Kumarila  elsewhere  (II,  3,  16).  If  this 
view  is  rejected,  it  is  possible  that  he  is  Bodhayana,  who 
certainly  wrote  on  the  Vedanta  Sutra,  but  this  theory  is  a 
bare  and  unnecessary  conjecture,  seeing  that  Bodhayana 
nowhere  else  appears  as  a  Mimamsa  authority.  Of  other, 
presumably  early,  commentators  we  hear  of  Bhartrmitra2 
and  Hari,3  but  there  is  no  reason  to  identify  either  of  these 
with  the  Vrttikara. 

The  extract  from  the  Vrttikara  proves  that  an  im 
portant  addition  has  been  made  to  the  teaching  of  the 
Mimamsa  in  the  shape  of  the  introduction  of  discussions 
of  the  validity  of  knowledge  and  its  diverse  forms. 
The  Sutra  itself  is  content  with  the  denial  of  the  validity 
of  perception  for  the  purpose  of  the  knowledge  of  Dharma, 
and  the  exaltation  of  Vedic  injunctions  as  the  source 
of  the  necessary  knowledge;  under  the  influence,  perhaps, 
of  the  Nyaya  the  earlier  doctrine  is  now  elaborated  into 
a  critical  examination  of  the  nature  of  evidence,  its  validity, 
and  the  forms  of  proof.  It  is  not  illegitimate  to  assume 
that  the  Vrttikara  e  indulged  also  in  metaphysical  discus 
sions;  at  any  rate  Sabarasvamin  enters  into  a  long  discussion 
of  the  nature  of  soul,  despite  his  predilection  for  brevity 
in  treatment  of  the  Sutra.  The  Mimamsa  therefore  by  this 
time  enters  into  the  whole  field  of  philosophy,  while 
maintaining  its  primary  duty  of  expounding  the  rules  by 
which  the  ritual  can  be  reconstructed  from  the  Brahmanas 
and  the  Samhitas. 

1  In  II,  3,  16,  he  clearly  describes  the  Vrttikara  as  bhagavdn 
dcaryah  ;  cf.  Ill,  1,  6.  These  passages  Jacob!  has  overlooked. 

1  Parthasarathi  on  Slokavarttika,  p.  4  (v.  10)  ;  he  is  cited  on  the 
organ  of  sound,  Nydyamanjarl,  p.  213. 

•  Sastradipika,  X,  2,  59,  60. 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  9 

Of  Sabarasvamin,  whose  commentary  forms  the  starting 
point  for  later  discussion,  we  know  practically  nothing  It 
is  an  idle  fiction  which  makes  him  the  father  of  the  mythical 
founder  of  the  Vikrama  era  (57  B.C.},  of  Bhartrhari,  and 
Varahamihira,  his  true  name  being  Adityadeva,  while  he 
adopted  the  soubriquet  Sabara,  when  he  disguised  himself  as 
a  forester  to  avoid  Jain  persecution.  The  form  of  his 
name  and  his  relation  to  the  Vrttikara  suggest  that  400 
A.D.  is  the  earliest  date  to  which  he  can  be  assigned;  the 
later  limit  is  vaguely  indicated  by  his  priority  to  Prabhakara, 
Kumarila,  and  Sarhkara. 

With  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  there  comes  a  sharp 
divergence  in  the  unity  of  the  teaching  of  the  school,  whose 
followers  henceforth  are  divided  between  the  adherents  of 
Prabhakara,  or  the  Guru  par  excellence,  and  the  supporters 
of  Kumarila  Bhatta.  It  does  not,  however,  appear  that 
Prabhakara  initiated  the  views  which  he  became  noted  for 
expounding  ;  he  cites  in  the  Brhatl,  his  '  great '  exposition 
of  Sabarasvamin's  Bhdsya,  the  opinions  of  a  Varttikakara 
who  presumably  must  be  regarded  as  the  true  founder  of 
the  school.  The  Brhatl  itself  is  unfortunately  only  extant 
in  imperfect  form  ;x  it  was  commented  on  by  Salikanatha 
in  his  Rjuvimala,  formerly  erroneously  regarded  as  simply 
a  commentary  on  the  Sabarabhdsya,  while  in  his  Prakara- 
napancikd2  the  same  author  deals  with  the  more  important 
epistemological  and  metaphysical  views  of  his  teacher.  The 
Brhatl  seems  to  have  passed  comparatively  early  into 
oblivion,  though  a  passage  from  it  is  cited  in  the  Mitdksard 
and  its  author's  views  were  well  known  in  MImamsa  circles. 

The  relation  of  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  is  represented 
by  tradition  as  those  of  pupil  and  teacher  ;  the  tradition  is 
fairly  old,  as  it  occurs  in  the  Sarvasiddhantasamgraha 
(I,  18,  19  ;  VII,  15)  attributed,  doubtless  wrongly,  to 
Sarhkara  himself.  But  the  discovery  of  the  text  of  the 

1  See  Ganganatha  Jha,  The  Prabhakara  School  of  Purva  MImamsa 
(1911). 

2  Ed.  Benares,  1903-04  ;  the  text  is  defective,  and  the  Prameyapdra- 
yana  is  lacking.  He  uses  Uddyotakara  (e.g.  p.  44)  and  Dharmakirti, 
and  therefore  is  not  before  650-700  A.D.,  but  is  probably  before  Kuma 
rila.  Prabhakara  thus  dates  about  600-650  A.D. 


10  THE  KARMA-MfMAMSA 

Brhatl  has  enabled  us  to  correct  this  error.  Prabhakara 
follows  Sabarasvamin  closely  ;  he  does  not  refute  the 
opinions  of  Kumarila  ;  in  one  passage  (IV,  1,  2),  when 
he  does  criticise  an  opinion  of  the  latter,  the  form  of  words 
used  by  him  in  adducing  it  differs  entirely  from  those  in 
which  the  view  of  Kumarila  is  expressed,  showing  clearly 
that  he  is  dealing  with  some  older  author,  whom  Kumarila 
has  followed.  On  the  other  hand,  Kumarila  frequently 
diverges  from  the  views  of  the  Bhasya;  he  criticises  (I, 
2,  31  ;  3,  2  ;  4,  1)  views  which  are  expressed  by  Prabha 
kara,  and  asserts  independent  views.  There  is  a  clear 
difference  of  style  between  the  two  authors  ;  Prabhakara 
is  comparatively  simple,  vivid  and  direct  like  Sabara 
svamin;  he  seldom  uses  long  compounds;  he  avoids  the  com 
bination  of  various  reasonings  in  a  single  clause  ;  in  lieu  of 
the  formal  terminology  of  objection  and  reply  (nanu  .  .  . 
ced,  na  or  sydd  etat  .  .  .  tad  ayuktam)  he  adopts  the  form 
of  question  and  answer,  which,  however,  has  the  disadvan 
tage  of  leaving  at  limes  the  meaning  in  doubt.  In  all  these 
aspects  Kumarila  shows  a  richer,  more  varied,  and  elaborated 
style,  which  is  reminiscent  of  the  Sarirakabhasya  of  Sarhkara. 
Kumarila's  great  exposition  of  the  Sabarabhasya  falls 
into  three  parts,  the  first,  the  Slokavdrttika,1  in  verse,  deals 
with  Pada  I  of  Adh}aya  I  of  the  Bhasya,  and  is  of  the 
greatest  value  as  an  explanation  of  the  metaphysics  and 
epistemology  of  his  system.  The  second,  the  Tantravart- 
tika,2  covers  the  remaining  three  Padas  of  Adhyaya  I  and 
the  whole  of  Adhyayas  II  and  III.  The  third  part,  the 
Tuptlka,  consists  merely  of  scattered  notes  on  the  last  nine 
Adhyayas.  Each  part  has  been  commented  on ;  the  first  by 
Parthasarathi  Misra  in  his  Nydyaratndkara,  and  by  Sucarita 
Misra  in  his  Kdsikd;  the  second  by  Somesvara,  son  of 
Mahadeva,  in  his  Nydyasudhd  or  Kanaka;  the  third  by 
Venkatesvara  Diksita  in  his  Vdrttikdbharana.  Kumarila's 
date  is  determinate  within  definite  limits;3  he  used  the 

1  Ed.    Benares,   1898-99;    trans.    Gangiinatha    Jha,    Bibliothcca 
Indica,  1900-8. 

2  Ed  Benares,  1890;  trans.  Gahganatha  Jha,  Bibliotheca  Indica, 
1903-20. 

3  Pathak,  J.B.R.A.S.    XVIII,  213  ff. 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  11 

Vdkyapadlya  of  Bhartrhari;  neither  Hiuen-Thsang  nor 
I-tsing  mentions  him;  he  was  before  Samkara;  he  attacked 
the  Jain  theory  of  an  omniscient  being  as  propounded  in  the 
Apt  aim  mams  a  of  Samantabhadra,  but  is  not  answered  by 
Akalanka  in  his  Astasati,  which  comments  on  the  Apta- 
mlmdrnsd.  On  the  other  hand,  he  is  freely  attacked  by 
Vidyananda  and  Prabhacandra,  who  both  lived  before 
838  A.D.  Vidyananda  assures  us,  doubtless  correctly,  that 
he  criticised  the  Buddhist  Dharmakirti,  and  Prabhakara,  on 
the  latter  point  agreeing  with  the  result  above  arrived  from 
internal  evidence.  The  upper  limit  of  date  is,  therefore, 
not  earlier  than  700  A.D.  The  lower  limit  depends  on  his 
precise  chronological  relation  to  Samkara  and  the  latter's 
exact  date.  Later  tradition,  the  Samkaravijayas  of  Madhava 
and  the  pseudo-Anandagiri,  would  make  him  an  older  contem 
porary,  but  the  interval  may  have  been  considerably  longer. 

Only  slightly  later  than  Kumarila  was  Mandana  Misra, 
author  of  the  Vidhiviveka,  a  treatise  on  the  significance  of 
injunctions,  and  the  Mimdmsanukramani,  a  summary  of 
Sabarasvamin's  Bhdsya.  The  tradition  of  the  Samkara 
vijayas  makes  him  out^  to  be  identical  with  Suresvara,  a 
pupil  of  Samkara,  but  Anandagiri's  account  insists  that  he 
was  also  a  pupil  of  Kumarila.  The  identification  with 
Suresvara,  which  might  be  suspected  because  of  the  lateness 
and  inferior  character  of  the  authorities,  is  to  some  extent 
confirmed  by  Vidyananda's  description1  of  Mandana 
Misra  as  Vedantavadin,  which  could  hardly  apply  to  him 
unless  he  were  the  author  of  the  works  ascribed  to  Suresvara. 
His  direct  connection  with  Kumarila,  however,  need  not  be 
insisted  upon.  His  lower  limit  of  date  is  fixed  by  the  fact 
that  the  famous  Vacaspati  Misra  devoted  the  Nyayakanikd 
to  the  exposition  of  his  Vidhiviveka,2  and  Vacaspati  pro 
bably  lived  about  850  A.D.  He  wrote  also  the  Tattvabindu3 
on  Kumarila's  views. 

Of  the  later  writers  the  most  f  important  is  perhaps 
Parthasarathi  Misra,  who  wrote  the  Sdstradipikd*  to  explain 

1  Ibid.  p.  228. 

1  Ed.  Pandit,  XXV-XXVIII,  1903-6. 

3  Ed.  Benares,  1892. 

4  Ed.  Benares,  1891.     He  is  earlier  than  Madhava. 


12  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

the  Sutra;  on  it  commented,  in  1543  A.D.,  Ramakrsna 
Bhatta,  son  of  Madhava,  in  the_  Yuktisnehaprapurani, 
Somanatha,  son  of  Sura  Bhatta,  an  Andhra  Brahman  of  the 
Nittal  family,  in^  his  Mayukhamalikd,  Vaidyanatha  (1710 
A.D.),  Bhatta  Sarhkara,  Bhatta  Dinakara,  Kamalakara, 
and  others.  His  Tantraratna  comments  on  points  in  the 
last  nine  Adhyayas  of  the  Sutra  and  the  Bhdsya,  while  his 
Nydyaratnamdla1  is  an  independent  treatise  on  which  Rama- 
nuja,  apparently  the  great  Vedantist,  has  written  a  comment, 
the  Ndyakaratna. 

Much  later  in  date  is  Khandadeva,  who  died  at  Benares 
in  1665  A.D.  His  works,  the  BhattadipikS,  and  on  a  larger 
scale  the  Mtmdmsdkaustubha*  deal  fully  with  the^  Sutra; 
the  former  was  commented  on  in  1708  by  his  pupil  Sambhu 
Bhatta.  Value  attaches  also  to  the  Mlmdmsdsutradidhiti  or 
Nydydvalldldhiti  of  Raghavananda  Sarasvati,  pupil  of 
Advaya,  pupil  of  Visvesvara,  and  to  the  Mlmdmsanaya- 
viveka  of  Bhavanatha  Misra,  which  deals  also  with  Sabara- 
svamin.  Yet  other  commentaries  are  recorded,  including 
works  by  Mahadeva  Vedantin,  Kamalakara  and  Vaidya 
natha,  son  of  Ramacandra,  the  Subodhinl3  of  Ramesvara 
Suri,  the  Bhdttacintdmani  of  Visvesvara  or  Gaga  Bhatta,  etc. 

Apart  from  the  Sutra  there  was  developed  a  considerable 
literature  which  aims,  as  did  Mandana  Misra,  at  dealing 
systematically  with  the  doctrines  of  the  school.  First  in 
importance,  perhaps,  is  the  Jaimimyanydyamaldvistara*  of 
the  famous  Madhava  written  in  the  fourteenth  century, 
which,  however,  is  merely  a  summary  in  verse,  with  a  prose 
comment,  of  the  Mlmdmsd  Sutra.  At  the  end  of  the 
sixteenth  century  Appayya  Diksita  wrote  his  Vidhirasdyana,5 
a  disquisition  on  the  nature  of  injunction,  adding  himself 
a  commentary,  the  Sukhopayojim.  This  text  was  refuted 
by  Gopala  Bhatta  in  his  Vidhirasdyanabhusana,  and  by 
Samkara  Bhatta  in  his  Vidhirasdyanadusana.  The  same 
author,  who  was  of  the  same  period  as  Appayya,  wrote 

1  Ed.  Benares,  1900. 

1  Ed.  Conjeveram,  1902  (I,  2  only).     The  Dipikd  is  ed.  in  the 

Bibliotheca  Indica. 

*  Ed.  Pandit,  XVII-XXI.  4  Ed.  London,  1878. 

"  Ed.  Benares    1901. 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  13 

a  commentary  on  the  Sdstradlpikd,  and  the  Mlmdmsdsdra- 
samgraha,1  in  which  he  enumerates  1,000  Adhikaranas, 
allotting  to  each  a  quarter  verse.  An  extended  version  of 
this  work  forms  his  Mimamsabalaprakasa?  on  which  there 
is  a  commentary  by  Kesava,  son  of  Visvanatha.  Appayya 
himself  wrote  also  the  Upakramapardkrama,  a  treatise  on 
the  comparative  importance  of  the  commencement  and  end 
of  a  continuous  Vedic  passage. 

The  most  popular  introduction  to  the  Mimamsa  is  pro 
bably  the  Mimdmsdnydyaprakdsa3  of  Apadeva,  son  of 
Anantadeva,  and  pupil  of  Govinda.  His  date  is  determined 
by  the  fact  that  his  son,  Anantadeva,  wrote  his  Smrti- 
kaustubha  under  a  prince  who  lived  in  the  middle  of  the 
seventeenth  century.  Anantadeva  commented  on  his 
father's  work  in  the  Bhdttdlamkdra,  and  his  brother, 
Jivadeva,  discussed  in  the  Bhdttabhdskara  the  divergent 
views  prevalent  in  the  schools.  Even  better  known, 
perhaps,  is  the  Arthasamgraha*  of  Laugaksi  Bhaskara, 
which  seems  to  be  based  in  part  on  the  work  of  Apadeva, 
and,  if  so,  must  belong  to  the  seventeenth  century.  This 
date  would  suit  adequately  the  probable  period  of  his 
popular  Nyaya-Vaisesika  treatise,  the  Tarkakaumiidl. 
Another  short  text  is  the  Mimdmsdparibhdsd5  of  Krsna 
Diksita,  and  the  Mlmariisdratna  of  Raghunatha,  who  uses 
the  Kdsikd,  contains  some  information  of  value  on  the  views  of 
the  opposing  schools.  Narayanatirtha  Muni's  Bhdttabhdfd- 
prakdsa0  is  an  exposition  of  the  terminology  of  the  Mimamsa, 
while  Ramakrsna  Udlcya  Bhattacarya's  Adhikaranakau- 
mudi7  expounds  a  selection  of  interesting  Adhikaranas. 
Khandadeva's  Bhdttarahasya8  deals  with  the  mode  of 
determining  which  is  the  leading  word  in  a  text  under 
discussionL  More  interesting  is  the  fact  that  the  famous 
Vallabha  Acarya  is  credited  with  a  Purvamimdmsdkdrikd, 
an  epitome  in  42  verses  of  Jaimini's  views,  written  with 
reference  to  the  doctrine  of  faith  which  Vallabha  expounded, 

Ed.  Benares,  1904.  *  Ed.  Benares,  1902. 

Ed.  Calcutta,  1901  ;   Benares,  1905. 

Ed.  and  trans.  Thibaut,  Benares,  1882. 

Ed.  Benares,  1904.  •  Ed.  Benares,  1900. 

Ed.  Calcutta,  1885.  8  Ed.  Conjeveram,  1900, 


14  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

and  a  Jaiminisiitrabhdsya  which  deals  with  the  first  chapter 
of  the  second  book  of  the  Sutra.  The  well-known  scholar, 
Venkatanatha  Vedantacarya,  in  his  Mimdmsdpddukd,1  in 
verse,  discusses  the  Adhikaranas  in  the  first  chapter  of  the 
first  book  of  the  Sutra,  and  in  his  Sesvaramlmamsa  seeks  to 
combine  the  Mimamsa  with  the  Vedanta.  Another  writer 
from  southern  India,  Venkatadhvarin,  deals  with  the  threefold 
classification  of  injunctions  in  his  Vidhitrayaparitrdna,  while 
in  his  Mimdmsdmakaranda  he  discusses  the  authoritative 
character  of  Arthavadas.  Narayana  of  Kerala,  the  well-known 
author  of  the  Ndrdyamya,  who  flourished  at  the  end  of  the  six 
teenth  century,  gives  in  the  first  part  of  the  Mdnameyodaya2 
an  account  of  Rumania's  views  on  the  nature  of  proof;  he 
purposed  completing  his  task  by  adding  an  account  of  the 
same  author's  views  on  the  world  of  reality,  but  this  part  of 
his  work  was  never  carried  out,  and  was  supplied  at  a  later 
date  by  another  Narayana,  who  was  patronised  by  Mana- 
deva,  king  of  Sailabdhi;  the  work  is  interesting  as  showing 
how  far  the  school  of  Kumarila  went  in  appropriating  the 
views  of  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  philosophy. 

Of  the  other  systems  it  is  the  Nyaya,  and  later  the  com 
bined  school  of  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  which  throws  the  most  light 
on  the  Mimamsa.  The  Nydya  Sutra  deals  critically  with 
the  Mimamsa  doctrine  of  the  eternity  of  the  word,  and 
Kumarila  and  Prabhakara3  alike  appear  to  have  developed 
their  philosophical  tenets  under  the  influence  of  the  contro 
versy  on  logic  which  took  place  between  the  Nyaya  school 
and  the  Buddhists,  especially  Dignaga  and  Dharmakirti  on 
the  other  hand;  Kumarila  attacked  both  of  these  writers 
and  was  clearly  aware  of  the  Nydyavdrttika  of  Uddyotakara, 
in  which  the  orthodox  Nyaya  view  was  set  out  in  refutation 
of  Dignaga's  onslaughts.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Mimariisa 
views  are  freely  disputed  in  Vacaspati  Misra's  comment  on 
Uddyotakara  and  in  Jayanta  Bhatta's  Nydyamanjari,  Varada- 
raja's  Tdrkikaraksd,  and  Udayana's  works,  much  of  the 
Kusumdnjali  being  expressly  devoted  to  dealing  with 
Mimamsa  criticisms  of  the  doctrine  of  the  creation  of  the 

1  Ed    Conjeveram,  1900.  »  Ed.  Trivandrum,  1912. 

s  Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  47,  64,  discusses  Dharoiaklrti's  views  of 
perception  and  inference. 


DEVELOPMENT  AND  LITERARY  HISTORY  15 

world.  The  Tattvacintdmani  of  Gangesa  repeatedly  attacks 
the  Mlmarhsa  views  of  the  nature  and  validity  of  proof,  and 
the  controversy  is  continued  in  the  voluminous  literature 
based  on  that  important  text,  and  in  the  short  text-books  of 
the  combined  school  of  Nyaya-Vaisesika.  In  his  commentary 
on  Prasastapada's  Bhasya  Sridhara,  from  the  point  of  view 
of  the  Vaisesika  deals  freely  with  Mimamsa  views;  moreover, 
the  Jain  Haribhadra  (ninth  century)  includes  in  his  Saddarsan- 
asamuccaya,  commented  on  by  Gunaratna,  an  account  of  the 
Mimamsa,  and  there  are  chapters  upon  it  in  theSarvasiddh- 
dntasamgraha,  falsely  ascribed  to  Samkara,  and  in  Madha- 
va's  Sarvadarsanasamgraha.  The  former  work  deals  separ 
ately  with  the  doctrines  of  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila;  it 
betrays  its  late  character  by  its  attempt  to  show  that  Prabha 
kara  was  the  pupil  of  Kumarila,  and  by  converting  the  doc 
trine  of  Kumarila  into  a  form  of  the  Vedanta.  The  work  of 
Madhava  gives  a  long  specimen  of  the  conflicting  views  of 
the  two  schools  as  to  the  interpretation  of  the  opening  of 
the  Sutra,  and  contains  an  interesting  exposition  of  the 
arguments  for  and  against  the  eternity  of  the  Veda,  and  the 
self-evidence  of  cognition. 

Jayanta  Bhatta's  work1  is  of  special  interest,  as  it  is  the 
product  of  a  member  of  a  family  skilled  in  the  Mimamsa, 
and  its  author  freely  attacks  Prabhakara  and  his  followers, 
and  repeatedly  cites  the  Slokavdrttika.  The  author's  grand 
father  was  confirmed  in  his  faith  in  the  efficacy  of  sacrifice 
by  obtaining  as  the  result  of  one  offering  the  village  of 
Gauramulaka,  doubtless  from  a  king  of  Kashmir,  for 
Jayanta's  great-grandfather,  Saktisvamin,  was  a  minister 
of  Muktapida,  better  known  as  Lalitaditya.  Incidentally 
Jayanta  affords  a  welcome  confirmation  of  the  Hate  of 
Vacaspati  Misra,  whom  he  quotes  (pp.  120,  312),  for, 
as  Lalitaditya's  reign  ended  about  753  A.D.,  it  is  impossible 
to  place  Jayanta  later  than  the  second  half  of  the  ninth 
century,  and  hence  the  disputed  era  of  the  year  898 
given  by  Vacaspati  himself  as  the  date  of  his  Nydyasuci 

1  Ed.  Benares,  1895.  His  quotation  from  Vacaspati  on  Sutra  II,  1, 
32,  is  found  at  p.  312.  His  son,  Abhinanda,  wrote  the  Kadambarika- 
thdsdra  and  lived  c.  900  A.D.;  Thomas,  Kavindravacanasamuccaya  • 
p.  30. 


16  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

must  be  taken  as  falling  in  the  Samvat  reckoning  as  841 
A.D.  This  date,  it  may  be  added,  tells^strongly  against  any 
effort  to  bring  down  the  date  of  Samkara,1  on  whose 
Sanrakabhasya  Vacaspati  wrote  the  Bhdmati,  and  the 
same  conclusion  is  favoured  by  the  view  that  Mandana 
Misra,  on  whose  work  Vacaspati  also  commented,  was  a 
pupil  of  Samkara. 

Varadaraja  also  claims,  with  obvious  truth,  to  have  been 
an  expert  in  Mimamsa;2  he  was  evidently  familiar  with 
Salikanatha's  work,  and  his  commentator  fortunately  preserves 
for  us  a  fragment  of  the  Frame  yap  dray  ana  chapter  of  the 
Prakaranapancikd,  no  MS.  of  which  has  yet  been  discovered, 
which  gives  an  authentic  list  of  Prabhakara's  categories. 

1  S.  V.  Venkateswara  (J.R.A.S.,  1916,  pp.  151-62)  ignores  this 
evidence  in  giving  Sarhkara's  date  as  805-897  A.D.  He  cannot  have 
died  later  than  825  A.D.  or  so. 

a  Ed.  Benares,  1903,  p.  364. 


II 

THE   PROBLEM   OF  KNOWLEDGE 

LIKE  the  Nyaya,  the  doctrine  of  Prabhakara  and  Kuma- 
rila  accepts  a  distinction  between  valid  and  invalid  know 
ledge,  but  the  basis  of  the  distinction  is  different  in  the  two 
cases,  and  the  ground  on  which  validity  is  asserted  is  also 
diverse.  To  the  Mlmamsa  apprehension  (anubhuti)  is 
intrinsically  valid,  while  remembrance  (smrti)  is  intrin 
sically  invalid,  since  it  rests  on  a  previous  impression;  the 
Nyaya  equally  disregards  remembrance,  but  it  does  not 
accept  the  intrinsic  validity  of  self-evidence  (svatahprd- 
mdnya)  of  apprehension;  apprehensions  may  be  valid 
(pramd)  or  invalid  (apramd),  the  proof  being  given  ab 
extra.  Remembrance  both  schools  distinguish  from  recogni 
tion  (pratyabhijnd),  which  is  not  regarded  as  depending 
solely  on  a  previous  mental  impression,  and  therefore  is 
exempt  from  the  fatal  defect  of  remembrance. 

The  intrinsic  validity  of  apprehension  is  a  cardinal 
doctrine  of  the  Mlmamsa  and  Kumarila1  defends  it  at  length 
against  the  obvious  objections  to  which  it  is  exposed.  It  is 
impossible,  it  is  argued,  for  apprehension  to  possess  the 
opposing  characteristics  of  validity  and  non-validity  as  part 
of  its  nature;  nor  can  the  validity  or  non-validity  of  appre 
hension  depend  on  the  ascertainment  of  the  perfection  or 
defect  of  the  cause  of  the  apprehension,  since  this  would 
imply  that,  prior  to  such  ascertainment,  apprehension  was 
devoid  of  character  of  its  own.  To  assume  that  some  cases 
of  apprehension  are  intrinsically  valid,  and  other  intrinsi 
cally  invalid,  is  open  to  the  objection  that  the  criterion 

1  Slokavarttika,  I,  1,  2,  vv.  21  ff ;  Sastradipika,  pp.  15,  31; 
Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  1-4,  74-78;  cf .  Nydyamanjan,  pp.  160-89;  Tdrkika- 
raksd  pp.  19  ff. 


18  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

between  the  two  sets  of  instances  can  only  be  supplied  by 
reference  to  an  external  factor,  which  is  fatal  to  the  belief 
in  intrinsic  validity  or  the  reverse.  Therefore,  the  Nyaya 
argues,  it  is  best  to  accept  the  doctrine  that  apprehension  or 
cognition  is  intrinsically  unauthoritative,  and  its  authorita- 
tiveness  in  any  special  case  is  derived  from  the  perfection  of 
the  cause  of  the  apprehension.  This  doctrine,  it  is  pointed 
out,  explains  the  case  of  dream  consciousness;  it  is  invalid 
because  there  is  no  perfection  in  its  cause,  while  the  waking 
consciousness  may  be  valid  if  it  is  due  to  a  perfect  source; 
if,  however,  the  source  is  vitiated,  when  the  sense  organs  are 
defective,  the  apprehension  is  doubtful  or  erroneous,  while 
in  the  case  of  non-apprehension  there  is  no  defect  in  the 
cause,  but  absence  of  cause. 

The  reply  of  Kumarila  is  that,  if  apprehension  were  not 
in  itself  valid,  it  could  not  be  made  so  by  any  external  power. 
Apprehension  needs,  indeed,  an  originating  cause,  but  it 
does  not  depend  on  any  external  cause  for  its  power  of 
ascertaining  the  true  nature  of  things.  The  conclusive 
argument  is  that,  if  the  validity  of  a  cognition  is  deemed 
dependent  on  the  perfection  of  its  source,  then  there  must  be 
another  cognition  to  guarantee  the  correctness  of  the  source, 
and  so  ad  infinitum,  and  such  a  process  is  illegitimate,  at 
least  in  the  eyes  of  Kumarila,  who  does  not  appreciate  the 
possibility  of  regarding  truth  as  a  complete  system,  in  which 
all  parts  are  dependent  on  one  another,  and  there  is  no  simple 
primary  truth.  All  cases  of  apprehension,  therefore,  are 
prima  facie  valid,  and,  if  cognitions  are  erroneous  or 
doubtful,  that  is,  due  to  defects  in  their  causes,  while  non- 
apprehension  is  due  to  the  absence  of  any  cause,  as  on  the 
Nyaya  theory,  with  which  Kumarila  agrees  in  this  regard. 

The  recognition  of  the  non-validity  of  an  apprehension 
establishes  itself  most  simply  when  a  subsequent  cognition 
sublates  an  earlier  cognition,  for  instance,  when  the  erroneous 
judgment,  "This  is  silver,"  is  supplanted  by  the  correct 
judgment,  "  This  is  mother-of-pearl."  More  indirectly  the 
former  judgment  can  be  sublated  by  another  judg 
ment,  based  on  the  recognition  of  the  defect  of  the  cause; 
thus  the  proposition,  "  The  shell  is  yellow,"  may  be  sub 
lated  by  the  further  judgment,  "  The  eye  is  jaundiced." 


19 

Normally,  however,  a  judgment  is  valid,  and  is  accepted  as 
valid  without  question;  only  if,  for  any  reason,  such  as 
distance,  doubt-is  possible,  are  further  cognitions  sought;  if 
then  a  sublating  cognition  is  found,  and  on  further  investiga 
tion  it  is  not  sublated  either  directly  or  indirectly,  then  the 
falsity  of  the  first  cognition  appears;  if,  on  the  other  hand, 
the  sublating  cognition  is  itself  sublated,  the  validity  of  the 
first  cognition  is  fully  established.  Thus,  in  lieu  of  the 
regressus  in  infinitum  of  the  Nyaya  theory,  no  more  than 
three  or  four  cognitions  are  necessary  to  establish  the  validity 
of  any  cognition,  or,  to  put  it  more  precisely,  to  negate  the 
objections  which  may  be  adduced  to  impair  its  normal 
validity. 

Prabhakara1  similarly  maintains  the  validity  of  all  cogni 
tions  as  such,  and  illustrates,  in  an  interesting  manner,  the 
diverse  modes  in  which  apparent  non-validity  arises.  When 
mother-of-pearl  is  mistaken  for  silver,  the  error  is  due  to 
the  fact  that  the  percipient  observes  in  the  object  presented 
to  him  the  qualities  common  to  the  shell  and  the  silver,  and 
omits  to  notice  those  which  differentiates  the  two;  memory 
thus  brings  back  to  him  the  cognition  of  silver,  and  this 
cognition  is  itself  real,  leading  no  less  than  the  actual 
perception  of  silver  to  the  normal  action  of  seeking 
to  take  up  the  object.  Memory  here  plays  the  percipient 
false,  for  it  does  not  present  the  silver  as  connected  with 
something  formerly  perceived,  thus  differentiating  it 
from  the  object  actually  before  the  eyes,  and  this  failure 
is  due  to  a  certain  weakness  of  the  mind.  Similarly, 
memory  is  to  blame  when  we  mistake  one  direction 
for  another;  the  real  direction  is  not  seen,  and  the  wrong 
is  remembered.  In  the  dream-state  the  cognitions 
which  arise  are  erroneous,  in  as  much  as  the  things  seen 
seem  to  be  directly  apprehended,  whereas  they  are  only 
remembered.  The  factor  of  apprehension  on  a  previous 
occasion  is  lost  sight  of,  thus  obliterating  the  essential 
distinction  between  what  is  apprehended  and  what  is 
remembered.  The  presentation  of  impressions  in  sleep  is 

1  Prakaranapancika,   pp.   32-38  ;    Bhandarkar    Commemoration 
Volume,  pp.  167-70. 


20  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

due  to  the  operation  of  the  unseen  principle,  that  is  the 
destiny  begotten  of  man's  previous  acts,  which  thus  secures 
to  man  pleasure  or  pain  in  due  course. 

In  other  cases  the  explanation  rests,  not  on  the  interven 
tion  of  memory,  but  on  fusion  of  impressions.  Thus  the 
white  shell  appears  as  yellow  as  a  result  of  jaundice,  the 
cognition  being  a  blend  of  the  shell  perceived  without  colour, 
and  the  yellowness  of  the  bile  in  the  eye,  perceived  without  its 
substratum.  So  the  bilious  man  feels  sugar  bitter,  because 
his  taste  is  a  blend  of  the  sugar  and  bile.  The  vision  of 
two  moons  is  due  to  a  lack  of  co-ordination  of  the  rays  of 
light  which  issue  from  the  eyes  and  bring  back  the  images. 

In  the  case  of  merely  doubtful  cognitions  the  explanation 
of  their  character  is  that  some  object  is  seen  as  possessed  of 
a  quality  which  produces  two  discrepant  remembrances; 
thus,  seen  at  a  distance  a  tall  object  may  be  either  a  pillar, 
or  an  ascetic  buried  in  meditation  and  motionless. 

As  the  Mimamsa  differs  from  the  Nyaya  in  its  view  of 
the  validity  of  cognitions,  so  it  differs  in  its  attitude  to  the 
mode  in  which  a  cognition  itself  is  apprehended.  In  the 
Nyaya  view  this  is  an  act  of  mental  perception  (manasapraty- 
aksa),  and  the  Vijnanavada  school  of  Buddhism  holds  the 
opinion  that  one  cognition  is  known  by  another,  though, 
going  further  than  the  Nyaya,  it  draws  the  conclusion  that,  if 
the  first  cognition  is  to  be  apprehended  by  the  second,  it 
must  have  form,  and  form  therefore  does  not  belong  to  any 
external  reality,  as  the  Nyaya  holds.  The  Mimamsa  as 
early  as  the  Vrttikara1  maintains  that  in  apprehension  it  is 
the  object  that  is  perceived,  not  the  cognition  (arlhavisaya  hi 
pratyaksabuddhih,  na  buddhivisayd}.  As  expounded  by 
Prabhakara,  consciousness  (samvit),  which  is  self-illumined, 
is  cognised,  but  not  as  an  object  of  cognition,  but  as  cogni 
tion  (samvittayaiva  hi  samvit  samvedyd,  na  samvedyataya) . 
To  say  that  the  cognition  is  unknown  is  absurd,  since  the 
cognition  of  things  is  possible  only  if  the  cognition  is  known. 
The  mode  in  which  cognition  is  known  is  inference;  in 
inference  we  grasp  the  existence  of  a  thing  only,  not  its 

1  Mimamsa  Sutra,  p.  9,  1.  16  ;  cf.  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  56-63  ; 
SaddarSanasamuccaya,  pp.  289,  290. 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  21 

concrete  form;  we  learn  the  presence  of  fire  on  the  mountain 
from  its  smoke,  but  we  do  not  see  the  actual  form  of  the 
fire.  Cognition,  therefore,  we  infer  from  the  fact  that  we 
know  things;  it,  therefore,  may  be  classed  as  an  object  of 
proof  (prameya),  since  it  is  arrived  at  by  the  use  of  infer 
ence,  which  is  a  means  of  proof  (pramana),  but  it  is  not  an 
object  of  direct  apprehension.  In  Rumania's  doctrine1  also 
this  view  appears,  though  the  doctrine  of  self-illumination  is 
rejected;  the  perception  of  any  object  does  not  result  in  a 
further  cognition  of  the  perception,  but  in  the  direct 
apprehension  of  the  object,  and  every  act  of  perception 
involves  a  relation  (sambandha)  between  the  self  and  the 
object;  this  relation  implies  action  on  the  part  of  the  self  as 
agent,  and  this  action  constitutes  the  cognition,  which  is 
inferred  from  the  relationship  between  the  self  and  the 
object. 

From  this  point  of  view  it  is  possible  to  understand  the 
definition  of  the  valid  apprehension  given  by  Parthasarathi 
Misra  as  that  which,  being  free  from  discrepancies,  appre 
hends  things  not  previously  apprehended.2  This  definition 
does  not  really  derogate  from  the  principle  of  the  self- 
evidence  of  cognitions;  the  qualification  of  freedom  from 
discrepancies  merely  lays  stress  on  the  fact  that  it  is  the 
absence  of  a  sublating  cognition  which  assures  us  in  case 
of  question  of  the  validity  of  a  cognition,  while  the  condi 
tion  that  the  thing  in  question  should  not  have  been 
previously  apprehended  is  not  a  new  factor,  but  merely  a 
formal  expression  of  the  essential  nature  of  apprehension. 
The  exact  process  of  cognition  as  explained  in  the 
Siddhantamukt  avail*  consists  in  the  production  in  the 
object  of  the  quality  of  being  cognised  (jnatata) ,  and, 
however  often  we  cognise  the  same  object,  nevertheless  in 
each  instance  the  quality  in  question  is  generated 
anew. 

The  precise  character  of  the  doctrine  was,  it  is  clear, 
largely  determined  by  the  desire  to  avoid  the  difficulty  of 

1  Cf.  Sastradipikft,  p.  37;  Manatneyodaya,  p.  103  ;  TSrkikaraksp, 
pp.  39  ff. 

3  $5stradipika,  p.  28. 

'-  P.  118  ;  cf.  Kusumafijali,  IV    1. 


22  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

the  infinite  regress,  which  seemed  to  be  involved  in  the 
theory  that  a  cognition  could  only  be  known  through  the 
instrumentality  of  another  cognition,  and  perhaps  still  more 
by  the  aim  of  avoiding  the  conclusion,  which  was  derived 
from  this  doctrine  by  the  Idealist  school  of  Buddhism,  that 
there  existed  no  self,  but  merely  a  series  of  cognitions,  held 
together  by  no  substantial  unity.  To  the  Mimamsa  such 
a  doctrine  was  naturally  anathema,  since  the  essence  of  the 
sacrificial  ritual  lay  in  the  fact  that  there  was  a  self  who 
could  profit  by  the  performance  of  sacrifices,  not  merely  in 
this  world  but  after  death.  It  might  have  been  hard  to 
convince  men  that  sacrifices  were  worth  performing,  if  the 
only  reward  held  out  had  been  success  in  this  life,  for  facts 
would  too  often  have  controverted  the  claim  that  sacrifices 
were  availing;  when  the  reward  was  predicted  for  the 
next  world,  the  issue  was  removed  from  empirical  verifica 
tion.  But  the  denial  of  the  possibility  of  introspection  thus 
necessitated  was  obviously  a  real  difficulty,  and  rendered  the 
Mimamsa  view  less  plausible  than  that  of  the  Nyaya,  which 
accepted  cognition  (vyavasaya}  and  as  supervening  upon  it 
consciousness  of  cognition  (amivyavasaya).  The  dis 
advantage  of  the  Nyaya  view  was  that  it  tended  to  ignore  the 
fact,  which  was  strongly  emphasised  in  the  Mimamsa,  of  the 
necessary  implication  of  the  subject  in  all  cognition.  The 
distinction  between  the  cognition  and  the  subject,  which 
possesses  it,  is  illustrated  clearly  in  the  case  of  sleep;  in  it, 
the  school  holds,  there  is  no  cognition  normally,  and  apparently 
no  cogniser  or  object  of  cognition,  yet  the  existence  of  both, 
despite  sleep,  is  proved  by  the  fact  of  remembrance  of 
dreams.  The  knowing  subject,  therefore,  is  not,  like  the 
cognition,  self-illumined,  though  as  to  its  exact  character 
Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  are  far  from  agreed. 

Of  forms  of  apprehension  or  cognition  Prabhakara 
recognises  five:  perception,  inference,  analogy,  scripture  or 
verbal  testimony,  and  presumption;  while  Kumarila  accepts 
also  non-perception  or  negation,  in  accordance  with  the  view 
of  the  Vrttikara,  who  thus  supplements  the  bare  mention  of 
perception  in  the  Sutra  (I,  1,  4),  where  it  is  defined  as  the 
contact  of  the  sense  organs  with  the  object,  which  must  be 
actually  present.  The  analysis  of  perception  given  by 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  23 

Prabhakara  shows  on  every  hand  clear  trace  of  derivation 
from  the  views  of  the  Nyaya  and  Vaisesika,  which  again 
are  ultimately  based  on  popular  psychology,  such  as  appears 
fitfully  in  the  Upanisads  and  in  Buddhist  texts.  The 
essential  feature  is  contact  between  the  object  and  the  organ 
of  sense,  which  is  essentially  something  real;  but  the  unity 
of  consciousness  makes  it  clear  that  there  must  be  a  further 
contact  between  the  organ  and  the  self,  whether  directly  or 
mediately.  The  fact  that,  despite  the  presence  of  objects  in 
contact  with  the  senses,  there  may  be  no  cognition  of  them, 
proves  that  the  contact  cannot  be  direct,  but  must  be 
mediated  by  an  instrumentality  called  mind.  It  is  this 
which  prevents  all  facts  being  always  and  at  once  present  to 
the  self,  and  it  is  this  which  perceives  pleasure  and  pain  and 
brings  them  home  to  the  self.  It  is  through  the  mind  also 
that  the  self  experiences  desire,  aversion,  and  volition.  But 
mind  has  no  qualities,  such  as  colour,  smell  or  taste,  and 
therefore  for  the  cognition  of  colour  it  needs  the  aid  of  an 
organ  which  possesses  that  quality,  namely,  the  eye,  which  to 
possess  colour  as  its  distinctive  quality  must  be  possessed  of 
light;  similarly  there  must  be  the  nose,  composed  of  earth, 
for  the  cognition  of  smell ;  the  tongue,  composed  of  water,  for 
the  cognition  of  savours;  the  skin,  the  crgan  of  air,  for  the 
cognition  of  touch;  and  the  ear,  consisting  of  the  ether,  for 
the  cognition  of  sound;  the  organs  themselves  being  imper 
ceptible. 

This  doctrine,  of  course,  rests  on  metaphysical  grounds 
and  assumes  in  its  treatment  of  the  organs  the  doctrine  that 
like  must  be  known  by  like.  The  deduction  of  the  exis 
tence  and  atomic  size  of  mind  by  Prabhakara  rests  on  the 
basis  of  a  doctrine  of  causation1  which  is  different  from, 
but  allied  to,  that  of  the  Nyaya,  and  which  is  applied  to 
explain  the  partial  and  evanescent  characteristics  of  our 
experience.  Causes  are  either  material  or  immaterial,  the 
latter  head  covering  all  the  circumstances  which,  in  conjunc 
tion  with  a  material  cause,  result  in  an  effect.  The 
immaterial  or  non-inherent  cause  may  subsist  either  in  the 

1  Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  52-54  ;  cf.  Slokavdrttika,  I,  1,  4,  vv. 
157  ff. 


24  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

material  or  inherent  cause,  or  in  the  material  cause  of  that 
cause;  thus,  when  by  contact  with  the  fire  smell  is  generated 
in  a  substance,  the  immaterial  cause  is  the  contact  with  the 
fire,  and  the  contact  subsists  in  the  substance  itself,  while, 
in  the  case  of  the  colour  of  a  mat,  the  colours  of  the  yarns 
which  cause  the  colour  of  the  mat  subsist  in  the  yarns, 
which  are  the  material  cause  of  the  mat.  In  the  case  of 
perception  the  soul  is  the  material  cause,  and,  as  the  soul  is 
uncaused,  the  immaterial  cause  must  subsist  in  it;  in  a 
substance,  like  the  soul,  only  a  quality  can  subsist,  and 
therefore  the  immaterial  cause  of  perception  must  be  a 
quality  of  the  soul,  and  this  can  only  be  some  contact  with  an 
independent  substance,  just  as  the  colour  of  the  earth  atom 
is  produced  by  contact  with  fire.  This  independent  sub 
stance  cannot  be  all-pervading  like  space  or  time,  contact 
with  which  is  from  their  nature  as  all-pervading  out  of  the 
question;  it  must  therefore  be  atomic,  and  the  only  substance 
which  fulfils  the  necessary  condition  is  mind,  residing  in  the 
body  ensouled  by  the  self,  and  possessing  the  power  of 
swift  motion,  by  which  it  can  form  a  rapid  series  of  contacts, 
giving  the  appearance  of  simultaneity  in  our  mental  life. 
The  deduction  is  ingenious,  but  unconvincing;  it  is  significant 
of  the  consciousness  of  the  gap  between  the  self  and  the  body, 
which  it  seeks  to  bridge  by  the  mediation  of  the  atomic  and 
therefore  corporeal,  but  yet  eternal  substance,  mind. 

Of  greater  philosophical  significance  is  the  attitude  of 
the  school  to  the  vexed  question  of  the  nature  of  perception 
as  determinate  or  indeterminate  (savikalpaka  or  nirvikal- 
paka).  The  Nydya  Sutra  (I,  1,  4)  poses  the  problem  in 
its  famous  definition  of  perception  as  knowledge  produced 
by  the  contact  of  the  sense  organ  and  the  object,  consist 
ing  of  a  determination  which  does  not  require  definition  by 
name  (avyapadesya}  and  is  not  discrepant  (avyabhicari). 
The  precise  of  this  declaration  is  far  from  certain,  as  the 
ambiguities  of  the  commentors,  Vatsyayana,  Uddyotakara, 
and  Vacaspati  Misra,  clearly  show,  but  Dignaga  and 
Dharmakirti  developed  a  perfectly  definite  theory  -  in 
which  a  clear  distinction  was  drawn  between  the  element 
of  sense  in  perception  and  the  function  of  imagination. 
In  the  narrowest  sense  perception  is  without  imagination 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  25 

and  is  unerring(kalpandpodham  abhrantam),  but  this  merely 
gives  us  a  momentary  contact  with  something  real,  but 
utterly  inexpressible,  the  momentary  unit  of  experience. 
All  our  knowledge  is  based  on  this  contact,  but  its  content  is 
supplied  by  the  imagination  (vikalpa),  acting  by  rules  which 
it  itself  imposes,  a  conception  which  has  obvious  analogues 
with  the  Kantian  doctrine  of  perception.1  Dignaga's  view  did 
not  prevail,  but  the  problem  had  been  brought  by  his  efforts 
into  clear  light,  and  the  later  Nyaya  seeks  in  various  ways 
to  explain  the  mutual  relations  of  the  indeterminate  and 
determinate  forms  of  perception.  Kumarila2  happily  ex 
presses  the  primitive  form  of  perception  as  bare  observation 
(dlocana)  pertaining  to  the  object  pure  and  simple,  and 
resembling  the  cognitions  that  a  newborn  child  has  of  its 
environment.  Prabhakara's  doctrine3  is  that  the  indeterminate 
perception  apprehends  both  the  class  character  and  the 
specific  individuality  of  the  object,  but,  inasmuch  as  neither 
class  character,  nor  individuality  can  be  fully  realised  save  by 
comparison,  the  first  apprehension,  since  it  is  made  without 
such  comparison,  is  indeterminate  in  character.  Deter 
minate  perception  arises  when  the  self  determines  the 
perception  by  recalling  both  these  things  which  it  resembles 
and  those  from  which  it  differs,  thus  recognising  both  its 
class  character  and  its  specific  individuality.  The  part  thus 
played  by  memory  in  the  determinate  perception  suggests 
that  it  must  be  deemed  as  invalid,  since  the  theory  of  error 
adopted  by  Prabhakara  finds  the  source  of  mistake  con 
stantly  in  the  intervention  of  memory.  But  Prabhakara 
does  not  accept  this  objection  as  applicable  to  his  own  view 
of  perception,  and  it  may  be  argued  that  the  action  of 
memory  in  this  case  does  not  apply  to  the  perception,  but  to 
the  things  which  agree  with,  or  differ  from,  the  object 
perceived.  There  does  not  appear  to  be  any  very  real 
difference  between  the  view  of  Prabhakara  and  that  of 

1  T.  von  Stcherbatskoi,  Museon,  1904,  pp.  129  ff ;   Keith,  Logic 
and  Atomism,  pt.  II,  ch.  ii  ;  SaddarSanasamuccaya,  pp.  33-41. 

2  Slokavartti-ka,  I,  1,  4,   vv.  Ill   ff ;   Manameyodaya,    pp.    8-10. 
The  determinate  form  adds  specification  as  substance,  class,  quality, 
motion,  or  name  ;  cf.  Nyayamaiijarl,  pp.  93-96. 

3  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  54-56. 


26  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

Kumarila,  though  their  verbal  expression  differs  ;  Kumarila 
holds  that  in  cognition  in  the  form  of  indeterminate  perception 
neither  the  genus  nor  the  differentia  is  presented  to  conscious 
ness,  and  that  all  that  is  present  is  the  individual  in  which  both 
these  characteristics  subsist.  Like  Prabhakara,  he  holds 
that  determinate  perception  is  no  less  valid  than  indeterminate 
perception,  since  it  merely  makes  explicit  what  is  implicit  in 
the  indeterminate  form. 

The  views  of  the  school  are  best  understood  when 
brought  into  contact  with  the  metaphysical  doctrine  to 
which  they  correspond.  The  essence  of  that  doctrine 
accepts  generality  as  a  real  existence  which  is  perceptible 
as  much  as  individual  things,  and  in  the  simplest  form  of 
perception,  therefore,  the  two  aspects  of  reality  are  equally 
present. 

The  objects  of  perception  include,  besides  generalities, 
substances,  qualities,  and,  in  the  view  of  Kumarila,  but  not 
of  Prabhakara,  motion.  The  Nyaya  holds  that  there  are 
six  forms  of  contact  in  perception;  substance  is  perceived 
by  conjunction;  qualities  by  their  inherence  in  what  is  in 
conjunction,  and  so  also  the  generality  of  substance  ; 
generality  of  quality  by  inherence  in  that  which  inheres 
in  that  which  is  in  conjunction  ;  sound  as  a  quality  of 
ether,  a  portion  of  which  forms  the  organ  of  hearing,  is 
perceived  by  inherence,  and  its  generality  by  inherence  in 
that  which  inheres,  while  negation  and  inherence  itself 
are  perceived  by  a  peculiar  and  artificial  variety  of 
contact,  styled  the  relation  of  qualification  and  qualified. 
Prabhakara,  though  he  accepts  the  doctrine  of  inherence, 
denies  genus  to  quality,  motion,  and  sound,  and  so  contents 
himself  with  recognising  the  first,  second,  and  fourth 
forms  of  contact  as  valid,  and  with  pointing  out  that 
to  perceive  qualities,  there  is  requisite  the  contact  of  the 
substance  and  the  organs,  of  the  organs  and  the  qualities, 
of  the  organs  and  mind,  and  of  mind  and  the  self.  Sub 
stance  and  qualities,  he  holds,  may  be  perceived  apart.  In 
Rumania's  school,  however,  which  denies  inherence,  the 
contacts  are  reduced  to  simple  conjunction,  and  identity 
with  what  is  in  conjunction  (samyuktatddatmya),  the  second 
covering  perception  of  generality  of  substance,  quality  and 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  27 

motion,  while  the  generalities  of  these  two  can  be  perceived 
by  a  relationship  of  identity  with  that  which  is  identical 
with  that  which  is  in  conjunction. 

A  further  technicality,  also  found  in  the  Nyaya,  is  the 
discussion  of  the  exact  nature  of  the  means  of  proof  and  its 
result.  If  the  term  Pramana  is  understood  as  "  means  of 
proof,"  then  perception  denotes  one  or  other  of  the  contacts 
between  object  and  organ,  organ  and  mind,  mind  and  soul, 
each  of  which  is  essential  to  the  result  (phala) ,  in  this  case 
the  mental  percept.  If,  however,  Pramana  denotes  the 
cognition  itself,  then  perception  signifies  the  mental 
percept,  and  its  result  is  the  attitude  of  acceptance,  rejection, 
or  indifference  of  the  subject  to  the  object  presented  to  him 
in  the  cognition. 

Inference  in  the  view  of  the  Vrttikara1  is  the  apprehen 
sion  of  a  thing  not  before  the  subject,  by  reason  of  the 
perception  of  some  other  thing,  between  which  and  the  first 
object  we  know  an  invariable  connection  to  exist.  The 
relation,  according  to  Prabhakara,  must  be  both  general  and 
constant;  examples  are  the  relation  between  the  class  and 
the  individuals;  substance  and  quality;  the  qualities  of  the 
same  substance;  or  cause  and  effect.  Smoke  stands  in  an 
invariable  relation  to  fire,  but  not  vice  versa,  for  on  the 
Indian  view  glowing  iron  emits  no  smoke.  Even  in 
dividual  events  may  thus  be  related  in  Rumania's  view; 
thus  the  sight  of  the  constellation  Krttika  suggests  the 
proximity  of  Rohini.  How,  then,  is  this  relation  to  be 
recognised?  The  Nyaya  view,  when  it  realised  the  question 
as  a  result  of  the  introduction  by  Dignaga  and,  following 
him,  Prasastapada  of  the  conception  of  a  universal  relation 
ship  (vyapti)  in  lieu  of  mere  reasoning  by  analogy,  found 
refuge  in  the  development  of  a  transcendental  perception 
(alaukika  pratyaksa2),  by  which  in  perceiving,  for  example, 
fire  and  smoke,  the  percipient  recognised  not  merely  the 

1  Mimdmsd  Sutra,  p.  10;   Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  64-87;   Sloka- 
vdrttika,  pp.  345-405  ;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  11-46;  Nydyamanjarl,  pp. 
109-41  ;  Logic  and  Atomism,  pt.  II,  ch.  iii. 

2  The   Mimarhsa   rejects   wholly  the  perception  of  Yogins,  which 
is  the  precursor  of  this   idea  in  the  early  Nyaya  ;   cf   Nydyamanjarl, 
pp.  93  ff. 


28  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

connection  of  the  individual  fire  and  smoke  perceived  by 
him,  but  that  of  fire  and  smoke  in  their  general  aspect. 
Prabhakara,  however,  does  not  recognise  this  view,  the 
elaboration  of  which  is  characteristic  of  a  later  epoch. 
He  denies  that  sense  perception  can  give  the  knowledge 
of  a  universal  connection,  since  it  deals  only  with 
particular  times  and  places;  he  also  rejects  the  view 
that  the  connection  can  rest  on  inference  or  presump 
tion,  since  obviously  thus  there  would  be  a  regressus  in 
infinitum;  nor  will  he  accept  the  view  that  it  is  due  to 
mental  activity  only,  as  suggested  by  the  doctrine  of  Dignaga, 
since  if  the  mind  had  this  power,  why  is  man  not  omnis 
cient  ?  His  own  view  is  that  fire  and  smoke  are  perceived  by 
sense  as  in  relation  to  each  other,  as  qualified  by  certain 
conditions  of  place  and  time.  By  repeated  experience  the 
impression  is  gained  that,  while  the  presence  of  smoke  is 
always  accompanied  by  the  presence  of  fire,  the  reverse 
relation  does  not  hold,  but  is  qualified  always,  unlike  the 
former,  by  special  conditions  of  place  and  time.  Hence 
emerges  the  recognition  of  the  permanent  relation  of  smoke 
and  fire,  so  that  the  sight  of  smoke  immediately  produces 
the  conception  of  fire.  He  admits  that  we  do  not  by 
inference  arrive  at  any  knowledge  which  we  had  not  before, 
but  he  does  not  admit  that  this  is  any  defect  to  the  inferen 
tial  process,  which  does  not  involve  novelty  of  result.  The 
school  of  Kumarila,  however,  in  accordance  with  its  defini 
tion  of  apprehension  as  involving  knowledge  of  something 
not  previously  apprehended,  points  out,  with  perfect  truth, 
that  the  actual  inference  gives  us  much  more  than  the  mere 
knowledge  of  the  connection  of  smoke  and  fire,  which  is 
already  known;  it  enables  us  to  infer  the  presence,  at  a 
particular  time  and  place  beyond  our  vision,  of  the  existence 
of  fire  as  result  of  the  perception  of  smoke.  Cidananda1 
recognises  also  the  part  played  by  the  reductio  ad  absurdum 
in  arriving  at  the  knowledge  of  the  universal  connection. 

The  relationship,  however,  which  affords  the  basis  of 
inference,  need  not  refer  merely  to  things  which  fall  within 
the  limits  of  perception  (drstasvalaksana);  matters  which 

1  Manamcyodaya,  p.  15, 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  29 

are  supersensuous  (adrstasvalaksana)  may  equally  be  in 
ferred;  thus  Prabhakara  deduces  from  the  general  principle 
of  the  relation  of  cause  and  effect  the  existence  of  the 
capacity,  e.g.  of  fire  to  burn.  In  the  Vrttikara  the  distinc 
tion  appears  as  pratyaksato  drstasambandha  and  samanyato 
-drstasambandha,  terminology  reminiscent  at  once  of  the 
Nyaya  Sutra  and  of  Prasastapada;  the  latter  is  illustrated 
by  the  inference  to  the  sun's  movement  from  the  observation 
of  a  man's  change  of  place  as  following  on  movement. 

Following  Dignaga  and  Prasastapada,  but  in  disagree 
ment  with  the  orthodox  commentators  on  the  Nyaya  Sutra, 
the  Mlmamsa  distinguishes  between  the  inference  for  oneself, 
which  is  the  true  logical  process,  and  that  for  another,  which 
is  in  reality  enunciation  for  another  person  of  the  process  of 
reasoning,  which  leads  to  his  drawing  the  conclusion  already 
arrived  at  by  the  first  person.  In  inference  for  one's  self 
the  process  is  that  something  is  perceived,  and  recognised  as 
invariably  connected  with  something  else,  which  thus  is 
recalled  to  the  mind;  in  inference  for  another  a  formal 
order  of  statement  is  usually  adopted.  First  the  proposition 
to  be  established  is  enunciated,  e.g.  "  The  mountain  is 
fiery,"  the  enunciation  serving  to  bring  before  the  mind  any 
contrary  judgment  which  might  sublate  it.  Then  the 
ground  for  the  conclusion  thus  set  out  is  given  in  the  form 
of  a  general  rule,  supported  by  a  corroborative  instance,  e.g. 
"  Where  there  is  smoke,  there  is  fire,  as  in  a  kitchen." 
Finally,  the  necessary  link  between  the  conclusion  and  the 
general  principle  is  supplied  by  the  statement  that  the 
middle  term  exists  in  the  subject,  e.g.  "  The  mountain  is 
smoking."  The  order  of  the  propositions  is  not  regarded 
as  of  importance  by  Prabhakara  or  the  other  members  of  the 
school,  who  agree  in  rejecting  the  more  complicated  scheme 
of  the  Nyaya  in  which,  with  a  certain  redundancy  due  to  its 
origin  in  dialectic,  the  argument  is  expounded  in  the  five 
propositions,  e.g.  "The  mountain  is  fiery;  Because  it  is 
smoking;  Where  there  is  smoke  there  is  fire,  as  in  a 
kitchen;  And  this  (mountain)  is  so  (possessed  of  smoke 
with  which  fire  is  invariably  concomitant) ;  Therefore  is  it 
thus  (fiery)."  The  omission  of  the  last  two  members  is  no 
material  injury  to  the  scheme,  while  Buddhist  logicians 


30  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

reduce  the  scheme  to  two  members  only.  The  retention  of 
the  example  is  due  to  the  origin  of  inference  as  a  process  of 
reasoning  by  simple  analogy;  even  when  the  necessity  of  a 
universal  connection  was  asserted  by  Dignaga  and  adopted 
by  Prasastapada  and  his  followers,  the  example  was 
religiously  attained,  and  it  is  not  until  the  latest  days  of  the 
Nyaya  that  we  find  Laugaksi  Bhaskara  declaring  that  the 
example  is  a  mere  superfluity.  But  Prabhakara  and  the 
school  of  Kumarila  are  agreed  in  insisting  on  the  use  of 
positive  instances  only,  rejecting  the  process  of  argument 
from  such  a  general  proposition  as,  "  Where  there  is  no  fire, 
there  there  is  no  smoke,  as  in  a  lake,"  though  Kumarila 
himself  recognises  its  utility,  though  not  its  necessity,  or,  as 
in  the  Buddhist  view,  sole  validity. 

In  the  case  of  inference  also  there  arises  the  problem, 
already  seen  in  regard  to  perception,  of  the  exact  force  of 
the  term  Anumana  and  the  corresponding  result.  If 
Anumana  is  used  as  equivalent  to  "  Inferential  Cognition," 
which  is  more  precisely  designated  Anumiti,  then  the  fruit 
or  result  is  the  attitude  of  acceptance,  rejection  or  indiffer 
ence  assumed  by  the  knowing  subject  to  the  inferred  result. 
If,  however,  Anumana  is  referred  to  the  means  by  which 
the  cognition  is  attained,  there  is  a  divergence  of  view  as  to 
the  exact  process  to  which  the  name  should  be  applied. 
The  most  immediate  cause  of  inference  is  the  perception  of 
the  middle  term  or  minor  proposition,  e.g.  "The  mountain 
is  smoking,"  but  a  more  scientific  Nyaya  view  accepts  as 
the  true  Anumana  the  whole  mental  process,  including  the 
consciousness  of  the  relation  between  the  middle  and  the 
major  terms,  through  which  the  major  term  comes  to  be  pre 
dicated  of  the  minor  term,  e.g.  fire  of  the  mountain.  The 
result  in  either  case  is  the  inferential  cognition  itself. 

The  doctrine  of  fallacies  is  deduced  both  by  Prabhakara 
and  by  Kumarila  from  the  definition  given  by  the  Vrttikara 
of  the  nature  of  inference.  Thus  Prabhakara  holds  that  the 
condition,  that  the  relation  between  the  two  terms  whence 
the  inference  is  deduced,  must  be  previously  known,  precludes 
all  those  cases  styled  in  logic  cases  of  the  too  restricted  middle 
(asddhdrana) ,  where  the  middle  term,  which  it  is  proposed 
to  use  as  a  basis  of  proof,  is  connected  with  the  subject 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  31 

of  the  inference  alone,  thus  permitting  no  further 
conclusion.  Earth,  for  example,  has  odour,  but  nothing 
further  can  be  derived  from  this  unique  relationship. 
Again  the  relation  must  be  universally  valid,  a  rule 
which  excludes  the  too  general  middle  (sddhdrana). 
It  is  impossible  to  prove  that  sound  is  eternal  because 
it  can  be  known,  since  many  things  can  be  known  and 
yet  are  not  eternal.  The  necessity  of  some  relation 
existing  excludes  the  variety  of  middle  term  known  as 
annulled  (bddhita);  to  prove  sound  eternal  because  it  is  a 
product  is  impossible,  since  the  character  of  being  a  product 
is  flatly  inconsistent  with  eternity.  Finally,  the  necessity, 
that  the  middle  term  should  be  perceived  as  the  basis  of  the 
attribution  of  the  major  to  the  minor,  excludes  the  variety 
of  middle  term  known  as  unreal  (asiddha);  thus  the  per 
ception  by  the  Buddha  of  righteousness  and  unrighteousness 
on  the  ground  of  his  omniscience  is  an  illegitimate  argu 
ment,  since  the  omniscience  of  the  Buddha  has  never  been 
perceived.  No  other  form  of  fallacy  of  the  middle  is 
accepted  by  Prabhakara  ;  he  rejects  the  Nyaya  view  of  the 
fallacy  of  the  counter-balanced  middle  (satpratipaksa); 
which  balances  against  the  argument,  e.g.  of  the  impercep- 
tibility  of  air  because  of  its  lack  of  colour,  the  argument  of 
its  perceptibility  because  of  its  tangibility.  Prabhakara's 
argument  is  that  it  is  not  possible  for  contradictory  predi 
cates,  such  as  lack  of  colour  and  tangibility,  are  thus 
assumed  to  be,  to  exist  in  respect  of  one  subject;  hence  one 
of  the  two  alleged  inferences  is  wholly  invalid,  and  there  is 
no  true  counterbalancing.  He  holds  that  really  contradic 
tory  inferences  are  possible  only  of  some  subject  whose 
nature  is  unknown,  in  which  case,  however,  in  the  absence 
of  the  essential  known  relation,  no  true  inference  is  attain 
able. 

The  views  of  Kumarila  do  not  differ  materially  from 
those  of  Prabhakara  ;  he  classifies  the  too  restricted  and 
the  too  general  fallacies  under  the  head  of  doubtful 
(anaikdntika) ,  and  adds  as  a  third  class  the  case  of  con 
flicting  inferences,  which  he  accepts,  contrary  to  the  views  of 
Prabhakara.  Of  the  unreal  (asiddha)  and  the  contra 
dictory  types  of  fallacy  he  gives  various  sub-divisions.  In 


32  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

this  and  in  his  elaborate  examination  of  the  generality 
(samanya),  which  lies  at  the  basis  of  inference,  he  shows 
plainly  his  close  relation  to  the  Nyaya  and  his  polemic 
against  the  Buddhist  views.  In  accord  with  the  older  view 
accepted  in  Buddhist  logic,  Prabhakara  recognises  not 
merely  fallacies  of  the  ground  (hetu),  but  also  of  the  minor 
(paksa),  the  example  (drstdnta),  and  even  of  the  proposi 
tion  (pratijna),  which  in  the  Nyaya  view  are  all  reduced 
to  special  cases  of  fallacies  of  the  ground. 

Analogy  or  comparison  is  accepted  by  both  schools  of 
MImamsa  with  the  Vrttikara,1  but  their  view  of  the  exact 
nature  of  this  form  of  proof  differs  from  that  of  the  Nyaya 
generally,  which  accepts  analogy  as  a  distinct  form  of  proof. 
In  the  Nyaya  view  the  process  results  in  the  cognition 
that  an  object,  hitherto  unknown,  when  brought  within 
the  range  of  perception,  is  recognised,  by  reason  of  its 
similarity  to  something  already  known,  to  be  the  object 
designated  by  a  name  communicated  by  some  person  of 
experience.  Thus  a  man  who  has  never  seen  a  buffalo 
in  his  life  is  informed  by  a  forester  that  the  buffalo  is  like 
the  cow  ;  on  entering  the  waste  he  sees  an  animal  similar 
in  appearance  to  the  cow,  and  formulates  the  judgment, 
"  This  thing  is  a  buffalo."  The  precise  force  of  the  judg 
ment  is  disputed  in  the  school,  but  the  best  opinion  is  that 
it  applies  not  merely  to  the  single  animal  seen,  but  that  the 
precipient  acquires  a  correct  apprehension  of  the  specific 
nature  of  the  whole  class  buffalo.  Thus,  as  Udayana2  says, 
the  effect  of  this  means  of  proof  is  to  give  a  clear  under 
standing  of  the  meaning  of  a  word,  though  he  rejects  the 
view,  held  by  Bhasarvajfia3  and  his  followers  in  the  Nyaya 
school,  that  analogy  can  be  reduced  to  a  particular  instance 
of  verbal  testimony  (sabda),  as  well  as  that  of  the 
Vaisesika,  which  reduces  analogy  to  inference.  The 
Mimamsa  view  of  the  analogical  cognition  is  that  it  consists 

1  P.  10;  Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  110-12  ;  Slokavarttika ,  pp.  433- 
50;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  47-51  ;  Saddarfanasamuccaya,  pp.  292,  293. 

2  KusumdnjaH,    III,   8-12 ;  Nydyamanjari,   pp.   141-49  ;    Tdrki- 
karaksd,  pp.  84-93. 

*  Nydyasdra,  pp.  30,  31.  The  Jain  view  (SaddarSanasamuccaya, 
pp.  205,  206)  reduces  it  to  recognition,  a  form  of  Parok^a. 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  33 

in  the  recognition  in  an  object  not  presented  to  the  senses  of 
similarity  to  an  object  which  is  actually  perceived.  Thus,  in 
the  instance  taken  above,  the  judgment  arrived  at  is,  "  The 
cow  which  I  saw  in  the  city  is  similar  to  the  animal1  I  now 
see  in  the  forest."  Both  schools  agree  in  this  view,  though 
Prabhakara  regards  similarity  as  constituting  a  distinct 
metaphysical  category,  a  position  denied  by  the  school  of 
Kumarila,  who  treat  it  as  a  quality  arising  from  the  fact 
that  more  than  one  object  possesses  the  same  set  of  qualities. 
The  separate  character  of  analogy  as  a  means  of  proof  is 
deduced  by  distinguishing  it  from  the  other  means  which  it 
resembles.  Thus  it  is  not  perception,  since  the  cow  is  not 
perceived  at  the  time  the  judgment  is  formulated;  it  is  not 
verbal  testimony,  for  it  involves  only  the  perception  of  simi 
larity;  it  is  not  inference,  as  the  mental  process  is  quite 
different;  nor  is  it  mere  memory,  for  the  similarity  is  not 
remembered.  The  Nyaya  view  is  declared  erroneous;  the 
assertion  that  the  buffalo  is  like  the  cow  cannot  be  assumed 
as  a  basis  for  the  conclusion,  since,  as  a  mere  human 
utterance,  it  may  be  untrustworthy;  the  cognition  of  the 
buffalo  and  its  similarity  to  the  cow  is  pure  perception;  the 
conclusion  that  the  animal  seen  is  what  is  denoted  by  the 
word  "  buffalo  "  is  merely  inference,  so  that,  if  the  Nyaya 
view  is  adopted,  there  is  no  real  independent  form  of  proof 
called  analogy  (upamdna),  or  true  analogical  judgment 
(upatniti).  While  the  polemic  against  the  Nyaya  is  not 
unsuccessful,  the  discussion  makes  it  clear  that  there  is  no 
real  separate  sphere  for  analogy  as  a  means  of  proof. 

Unlike  the  Nyaya,  both  schools  of  Mimamsa  accept,  with 
the  Vrttikara,  presumption  (arthdpatti)  as  a  separate  means 
of  proof.2  But  Prabhakara's  analysis  of  this  form  of 
demonstration  differs  radically  from  that  of  Kumarila.  Pre 
sumption  in  his  view  arises  when  it  is  necessary  to  assume 
some  fact  in  order  to  avoid  inconsistency  in  respect  of  some 
thing  which  is  actually  perceived.  Thus,  if  we  know  that  a 

1  For  "  the  buffalo  "  ;   the  Mimamsa  view  does  not  recognise  the 
previous  information  as  to  the  likeness  of  the  cow  and  buffalo. 

2  Mimdmsd     Sutra,     p.     10;     Prakaranapancika,     pp.    11318; 
Slokavdrttika,  pp.  450-72  ;  Manameyodaya,  pp.  51-57;  cf.  Nyayaman- 
jari,  pp.  36-48;  SaddarSanasamuccaya,  pp,  293-95. 

3 


34  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

man  who  is  alive  is  not  in  his  house,  we  must  assume  that 
he  has  gone  out,  in  order  to  make  our  thinking  consistent 
with  our  perception.  To  give  rise  to  presumption  there 
must,  Prabhakara  holds,  be  doubt,  which  the  presumption 
removes,  and  this  element  serves  to  distinguish  presumption 
from  inference,  since  inference  can  only  begin  when  a  certain 
fact,  e.g.  the  existence  of  smoke,  is  known  with  perfect 
certainty.  On  the  other  hand.  Rumania's  view  is  that  pre 
sumption  is  impossible,  if  the  original  fact  were  in  doubt; 
it  is  only  because  the  absence  of  the  man  from  his  house  is 
for  certain  known  that  it  can  come  into  operation;  the  origin 
of  presumption  lies  rather  in  the  apparent  inconsistency  of 
two  equally  certain  facts,  in  this  case,  the  man's  absence 
and  his  being  alive,  which  leads  to  the  enunciation  of  a 
presumption  to  reconcile  the  apparent  discrepancy,  and  it 
is  this  reconciliation  of  apparent  discrepancies  which 
marks  out  presumption  from  inference.  The  Nyaya  on  the 
contrary  finds  place  for  presumption  under  the  purely- 
negative  (kevalavyatirekin)  form  of  inference,  in  which  it 
is  impossible  to  adduce  a  positive  instance  of  the  general 
rule,  but  the  Mimamsa  could  not  accept  this  view  since  it 
declined  to  regard  the  use  of  the  negative  form  in  inference 
as  satisfactory. 

Unlike  the  Nyaya  the  Vrttikara1  accepts  non-existence 
(abhava),  or,  as  it  is  also  termed,  non-apprehension 
(anupalabdhi) ,  as  a  separate  means  of  proof.  The  argu 
ment  in  favour  of  this  view  adopted  by  Kumarila  is  that 
the  absence  of  any  thing,  e.g.  of  a  jar  on  a  particular  spot 
of  ground,  cannot  be  the  object  of  direct  perception,  which 
admittedly,  according  to  the  definition  of  the  Mimamsa 
Sutra,  requires  a  present  contact  with  the  organs  of  sense, 
nor  can  it  be  arrived  at  by  inference,  analogy,  presumption 
or  verbal  testimony.  It  can  only  arise  into  an  object  of 
knowledge  through  the  fact  that  none  of  the  normal  methods 
of  cognition  can  come  into  operation,  and  this  peculiarity 
distinguishes  it  from  any  of  these  means.  Prabhakara, 

1  P.  10;  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  118-25  ;  Slokavarttika,  pp.  473- 
92  ;  Manameyodaya,  pp.  58-62,  114-18  ;  cf.  Nyayamaiijari,  pp.  49-54  ; 
§addarSanasamuccaya,  pp.  295-98;  it  is  refuted  from  the  Jain  stand 
point,  ibid.  pp.  206-7, 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  35 

with  the  Nyaya  and  Vaisesika,  declines  to  accept  non- 
apprehension  as  a  distinct  means  of  proof.  When  we  say, 
"  The  jar  is  not  on  the  ground,"  all  that  we  mean  is  that, 
if  the  jar  were  on  the  ground,  we  would  perceive  it  there, 
but  that  as  a  matter  of  fact  we  see  the  ground  alone.  The 
seeing  of  the  ground  is  mere  perception,  and  the  further 
statement  is  merely  a  qualification  of  what  is  perceived  in 
terms  of  something  which,  formerly  seen  along  with  it,  is 
not  now  present.  In  this  there  is  no  separate  mental 
process  leading  to  proof.  The  Nyaya  also  escapes  the 
difficulty  by  adopting  a  peculiar  doctrine  of  its  own,  under 
which  non-existence,  regarded  as  a  positive  entity,  is 
perceived  by  a  peculiar  mode  of  contact  known  as  the 
relation  of  qualifier  and  qualified. 

Whether,  however,  four,  with  Prabhakara,  or,  with  the 
Vrttikara  and  Kumarila,  five  means  of  proof  other  than 
verbal  testimony  or  scripture  are  reckoned,  all  these  means 
of  proof  are  subject  to  the  defect  that  they  do  not  avail  to 
determine  the  nature  of  Dharma,  man's  duty  and  righteous 
ness.  This  is  established  by  the  Sutra  (I,  1,  4)  for  the 
case  of  perception;  that  means  of  proof  deals  only  with 
existing  things  which  can  be  brought  into  contact  with  the 
organs  of  sense,  but  duty  is  a  thing  which  is  not  already 
existing,  but  needs  man's  action  to  bring  it  to  fruition,  and 
duty  is  not  tangible  so  as  to  be  able  to  come  into  contact 
with  the  organs.  Inference,  analogy,  presumption,  and 
non-apprehension,  all  have  relation  to  perception,  and  for 
that  reason  are  vitiated  by  the  defects  of  the  latter,  as  we 
gather  from  the  Vrttikara,  who  thus  supplements  Jaimini. 
On  the  other  hand,  Jaimini  declares  that  the  relation  of  the 
word  to  its  meaning  is  natural  and  eternal,  and  Vedic  injunc 
tions  are,  therefore,  the  source  of  knowledge  of  duty,  which 
is  something  not  open  to  ordinary  means  of  apprehension. 
Such  injunctions  are  authoritative,  according  to  Badarayana 
as  cited  in  the  Mlmdmsd  Sutra,  because  of  their  independ 
ence.  In  the  definition  of  the  Vrttikara1  scriptural  cognition 
(sastra)  is  the  cognition  of  some  thing,  which  is  not  percept- 

1  P.  10  ;  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  87-110,  131-40,  161-70;  S.oka- 
varttika,  pp.  405-33,  498  ff,  728  ff ;  Mtnameyodaya,  pp.  40-47;  cf. 
Nyayamanjari,  pp,  150  ff,  205  ff. 


36  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

ible,  through  the  instrumentality  of  intelligible  sounds,  that 
is  words,  whose  meaning  is  known.  The  further  analysis 
of  Prabhakara  shows  that  each  word  is  composed  of  letters 
which  are  severally  apprehended,  impressions  of  the  earlier 
letters  blending  with  that  produced  by  the  cognition  of  the 
last  letter  to  bring  about  the  idea  of  the  whole  word,  which 
alone  has  the  power  to  bring  about  the  comprehension  of  a 
single  definite  meaning.  The  letters,  then,  are  the  means  of 
verbal  cognition,  since  it  is  they  which  by  combination 
compose  the  word  and  bring  about  the  comprehension  of  its 
meaning.  With  Rumania  Prabhakara  agrees  in  disregard 
ing  the  grammatical  school's  doctrine  of  Sphota,  an  entity 
which  is  invented  to  meet  the  difficulty  felt  by  the  grammar 
ians  as  to  the  possibility  of  any  combination  of  impressions 
from  individual  letters  producing  the  unity,  which  enables 
us  to  comprehend  the  meaning  of  a  word,  and  in  this  view 
the  Vedanta,  Nyaya,  Vaisesika  and  Samkhya  are  at  one  with 
the  Mlmamsa,  leaving  the  Yoga  only  to  support  the  doctrine 
of  the  grammarians.1 

The  meaning  of  words  is  declared  by  Jaimini  to  be 
natural  (autpattika),  and  Prabhakara  insists  on  the  fact  that 
words  cannot  be  supposed  to  owe  their  meanings  to  conven 
tion,  whether  human  or  divine.  The  view  of  the  school  in 
this  regard  can  hardly  be  regarded  as  anything  else  than  an 
attempt  to  bring  the  doctrine  of  verbal  testimony  into  har 
mony  with  their  traditional  beliefs  in  the  nature  in  the  Veda, 
which  doubtless  long  preceded  their  speculations  on  the 
nature  of  the  relation  of  word  and  meaning.  The  Nyaya 
view,  that  meanings  were  given  to  words  by  a  convention  due 
to  the  action  of  God,  offended  the  Mimarhsa  belief  that  the 
Veda  had  no  creator,  and  that  no  God,  as  understood  by  the 
Nyaya,  existed.  The  alternative  of  human  convention  con 
tradicted  flatly  the  Mimarhsa  belief  that  the  essential  function 
of  the  Veda  was  to  lay  down  injunctions  for  the  performance 
of  actions,  whence  arose  an  invisible  potency  (apurva)  leading 
to  a  desirable  end,  and  that  this  potency  was  a  thing  of 

1  Cf.  Max  Miiller,  Six  Systems,  pp.  527-44  ;  a  full  refutation  of  the 
doctrine  of  Bhartrhari  that  Sabda  is  the  source  of  the  world  and  is  the 
lower  form  of  the  absolute,  Brahman,  is  given  in  Nyayamanjan,  pp. 
531-36;  cf.  SarvadarSanasamgraha,  ch,  xrii, 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  37 

which  no  person,  save  through  the  Veda,  could  have  any 
knowledge.  The  Nyaya  argument  in  favour  of  convention, 
derived  from  the  case  of  proper  names,  is  met  by  the 
admission  that  in  the  case  of  such  names  convention 
is  active,  but  that  common  names  stand  on  a  different  footing. 
In  the  former  case,  we  know  that  the  persons  or  things 
so  called  have  a  beginning  in  time,  and  that  some  person 
must  have  applied  the  names  to  them;  in  the  case  of 
common  names  we  have  no  warrant  for  finding  a  begin 
ning  in  time  for  either  the  things  or  the  words.  There 
has  been  no  beginning  of  the  world  or  of  men,  and 
they  must  have  from  the  first  talked  of  the  things  of  the 
world,  just  as  in  actual  life  it  is  from  observing  the  conver 
sation  of  his  elders,  or  by  their  instruction,  that  a  youth 
learns  the  meanings  of  words.  What  is  still  more  conclusive 
evidence  is  that,  unless  we  recognised,  as  we  do,  that  words 
possess  of  their  own  nature  meanings,  we  could  never  form 
the  conception  of  conventional  meanings,  which  is  a  later 
development. 

The  eternity  of  the  word  is  established  formally  and  at 
length  by  Jaimini  in  a  systematic  refutation  (I,  l,6-23)of  the 
objections  directed  against  the  doctrine  by  the  Nyaya  school 
in  particular.  The  Nyaya1  holds  that  the  eternity  of  the 
word  is  precluded  by  the  fact  that  it  is  perceptible  only 
after  effort;  that  it  is  evanescent;  that  in  common  parlance 
men  talk  of  producing  a  sound,  just  as  they  speak  of  produc 
ing  any  ordinary  article;  that  the  same  word  is  pronounced 
by  many  people  and  in  many  places;  that  words  have 
changes  in  form,  such  as  dadhy  atra  for  dadhi;  and  that, 
when  uttered  by  many  people,  the  volume  of  sound  is 
increased.  The  reply  of  Jaimini  insists  that  the  apparent 
production  of  sound,  regarded  by  the  Nyaya  as  a  creation, 
is  only  a  manifestation  of  a  pre-existing  entity,  a  fact  in 
harmony  with  the  disappearance  of  words  on  the  cessation  of 
the  manifestation,  while  products  proper  remain  in  being. 
The  analogy  of  the  sun  refutes  the  argument  from 
simultaneity  of  perception  by  many  persons;  the  change  to 

1  The  Sutra  (II,  2,  23-59)  deals  with  the  topic,  but  in  such  a  way 
as  to  ghow  in  all  likelihood  posteriority  to  the  Mim&msa  Sutra. 


38  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

dadhy  atra  is  not  a  modification  of  the  letter  i,  but  the 
substitution  of  a  quite  different  form;  increase  of  magnitude 
refers  to  the  tone,  not  to  the  word  itself.  Positive  argu 
ments  for  the  eternity  of  the  word  are  not  lacking.  If  it  were 
not  so,  it  would  fail  in  its  purpose,  the  conveying  of  a 
meaning  to  another.  Again,  we  do  find  in  point  of  fact  that 
men  recognise  words  as  being  the  same  when  uttered  on 
diverse  occasions  by  diverse  people.  Language  supports  the 
MImarhsa  case;  when  a  word  is  repeated,  we  talk  of  ten 
repetitions  of  the  word,  not  of  ten  words.  Moreover,  no 
cause  for  the  destruction  of  words  is  adduced,  and  in  non- 
eternal  things  causes  of  destruction  are  always  to  be  found. 
Finally,  there  is  Vedic  authority  for  the  doctrine  and  no 
valid  counter  authority. 

The  word  then  exists  ever,  but  only  from  time  to  time 
by  effort  on  the  part  of  some  being  is  it  made  manifest  to 
us.  But  effort  is  not  enough;  the  deaf  do  not  hear,  and  the 
effort  must  be  supported  by  a  suitable  organ  which  aids  in 
the  cognition  of  the  word.  Through  the  effort  on  the  part  of 
the  speaker,  the  air  from  his  lungs  rises  upwards  and  comes 
into  contact  with  the  vocal  chords,  by  which  it  is  modified 
in  character.  Passing,  then,  out  from  the  mouth,  it  reaches 
the  ears  of  those  near  enough  to  be  affected,  produces  in 
their  ears  a  change  favourable  to  audition,  and  passes  out, 
bringing  to  a  close  the  audition.  The  ear  cavity  contains  a 
layer  of  air,  upon  which  the  air  current  issuing  from  the 
speaker's  mouth  impinges,  producing  the  condition  on  which 
audition  supervenes.  Thus  the  MImamsa  rejects  the  primi 
tive  conception  under  which,  as  light  from  the  eye  travels  to 
its  object  and  brings  back  vision,  so  the  sound  travels  in 
some  form  to  the  source  of  the  sound,  as  held  by  the  Jains, 
and  the  Samkhya  view  that  the  sense  of  hearing,  as  all- 
pervading,  reaches  the  place  of  the  sound.  It  also  rejects 
the  Buddhist  view  that  actual  contact  is  unnecessary  for 
hearing,  and  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  doctrine  of  propagation 
of  sound  on  the  analogy  of  waves,  or  the  filaments  of  the 
Kadamba  flower,  in  the  ether  until  it  reaches  the  ether 
enclosed  in  the  ear  cavity,  which,  on  that  view,  constitutes 
the  organ  of  hearing.  To  this  opinion  Kumarila  objects 
that,  the  ether  being  one  and  indivisible,  if  one  ear  is 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  39 

affected,  all  ears  should  equally  be  affected,  and  every  sound 
be  heard  by  every  one;  or,  again,  if  one  man  is  deaf, 
everyone  should  no  less  be  deaf.  The  Mimamsa  evades 
this  objection  by  the  doctrine  that  the  ear  cavity  contains 
air,  and  that  it  differs  in  size  and  shape  from  man  to  man. 
A  further  objection  to  the  wave  theory  is  also  based  on  the 
fact  that  sounds  travelling  with  the  wind  are  heard  at 
further  distances  than  sounds  travelling  against  the  wind, 
which  is  inexplicable  if  the  propagation  of  waves  takes 
place  in  the  ether,  which,  of  course,  is  unaffected  by  wind. 
The  essential  character  of  the  word  is,  in  the  view  of 
Jaimini,  not  mere  denotation,  but  injunction,  a  view  which 
clearly  stands  in  close  relation  to  the  doctrine  that  the 
meaning  of  words  is  largely  learned  by  the  young  from  the 
observation  of  intercourse  among  the  old ;  one  addresses  the 
other,  and  the  other  acts  as  a  result;  one  says,  gam  dnaya, 
the  other  brings  the  cow.  Hence,  as  against  the  Vedanta,  it 
is  denied  that  the  essence  of  Vedic  texts  lies  in  the  making 
manifest  of  the  sole  existent  Brahman,  and  asserted  that, 
even  when  this  seems  to  be  the  case,  the  real  import  of  the 
text  is  an  injunction  to  meditate  on  the  Brahman.  From 
this  view  Prabhakara  proceeds  to  develop  a  conclusion, 
which  is  in  harmony  with  the  view  of  Sabarasvamin,  that 
words  themselves  have  no  meaning,  and  obtain  it  only  in 
sentences,  properly  injunctive  clauses;  gam  by  itself  is 
nothing,  but  attains  meaning  when  conjoined  with  anaya, 
the  whole  then  signifying  generically  the  genus  cow  as  con 
nected  with  bringing.  This  view  in  the  school  obtains  the 
name  of  the  theory  of  signification  in  syntactical  combination 
(anvitabhidhdna) ,  in  opposition  to  the  view  of  Kumarila, 
who  admits  that  words  possess  a  meaning  independently  of 
combination  in  injunctive  sentences,  and  whose  theory 
accepts,  therefore,  the  combination  of  significant  terms 
(abhihitdnvaya) .  The  two  schools,  however,  are  at  one  in 
holding  that  the  signification  of  words  is  a  class  signifi 
cation  (I,  3,  30-35),  as  the  theory  of  the  eternity  of  words 
demands.  The  modern  Nyaya,  on  the  other  hand,  insists 
that  the  import  of  words  is  always  the  concrete  individual, 
while  the  older  Nyaya  (II,  2,  61-71)  adopts  the  doctrine 
that  the  word  expresses  the  class  (jdti),  individual  (vyakti), 


40  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

and  characteristic  mark  of  the  class  (dkrti),  all  at  once. 
The  Buddhist  view,  again,  insists  on  negative  determination 
only,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  impossible  to  determine 
positively  the  specific  nature  of  anything,  and  that  all  that 
can  be  attained  is  a  series  of  negations,  a  view  which 
Kumarila  refutes  at  great  length,1  insisting  that  the  doctrine 
would  mean  the  impossibility  of  distinguishing  between  any 
two  things,  since,  for  instance,  both  the  cow  and  the  horse 
are  negatives  of  the  elephant,  and  could  never  deal  with 
individuals,  each  negation  being  necessarily  general.  The 
defender  of  Apoha  thus  accepts  the  existence  of  negative 
classes,  which  must  be  all  identical,  since  he  cannot  rely, 
ex  hypothesi,  on  any  positive  means  of  discrimination  between 
them. 

The  case  for  the  claim  that  words  denote  individuals,  as 
put  in  the  Sutra  (1,3,33)  in  the  view  of  Prabhakara,  is  that, 
if  it  were  not  so,  all  injunctions,  Vedic  or  profane,  would 
become  meaningless;  number  and  gender  would  be  out  of 
place  with  regard  to  nouns;  there  could  be  no  words  to 
express  qualities,  and  agreement  between  noun  and  adjective 
would  be  impossible.  Prabhakara  replies  by  insisting  that, 
as  indicated  by  the  Bhasya,  if  words  had  individual 
meanings,  such  a  sentence  as,  "  One  should  pile  the  fire  altar 
in  the  form  of  a  kite,"  would  be  meaningless,  as  it  cannot 
be  supposed  that  such  an  injunction  was  intended  to  refer 
to  an  individual  kite,  while  its  plain  meaning  is  a  reference 
to  the  class  "  kite."  Without  this  element  of  generality  all 
injunctions  are  absurd,  and  the  necessary  individual  reference 
in  certain  cases  is  obtained  through  the  generality,  with 
which  it  is  inseparably  connected.  Kumarila  adds  that  this 
view  is  supported  by  the  fact  that  the  word  "  cow,"  as 
experience  shows,  does  not  suggest  to  us  an  individual  cow, 
but  the  class;  if  individuals  were  denoted  by  words,  a  generic 
idea  like  "  cow  "  would  be  impossible,  and  even  if  possible 
would  merely  consist  of  the  impression  of  all  the  peculiarities 
of  all  cows  known  to  the  thinker.  Again,  the  word  cannot 
denote  all  the  individuals,  since  this  would  mean  that  the 

1  Slokavarttika,  pp.  566-614;  Nyayamanjarl,  pp.  303-8;  contrast 
Ratnakirti's  Apohasiddhi  (Six  Buddhist  Nyaya  Tracts,  pp.  1-19). 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  41 

word  possessed  as  many  potencies  of  denotation  as  there  were 
individuals,  and,  as  all  the  individuals  could  never  be 
known,  the  word  would  never  fully  be  comprehended.  Nor 
could  the  word  denote  an  aggregate  of  individuals 
since  all  individuals  cannot  be  known,  and  therefore  an 
aggregate  could  not  be  known,  while,  even  if  it  could  be 
known,  as  its  constituent  parts  would  be  ever  perishing  or 
replaced,  the  signification  of  the  word  would  be  a  constant 
flux.  Finally,  if  the  word  meant  a  single  individual  only, 
there  could  be  no  eternal  connection  between  word  and 
meaning,  and,  in  the  absence  of  any  means  of  discovering 
which  individual  was  meant,  action  would  be  impossible. 
The  difficulty  regarding  sacrificial  operations  in  regard  to  a 
class  instead  of  an  individual,  is  disposed  of  by  pointing  out 
that  such  actions  must  be  performed  by  substances,  and 
that  the  injunctions  specify,  not  the  individual  substance 
to  be  used  in  any  special  case,  but  the  class  of  sub 
stance,  individual  portions  of  which  are  applied  by  each 
sacrificer. 

As  regards  the  authority  attaching  to  words  there  is  a 
sharp  distinction  between  the  older  school,  followed  by  Pra 
bhakara  and  Kumarila.  Prabhakara  holds  that  the  only 
authoritative  testimony  to  things  beyond  the  reach  of  the 
senses  and  other  means  of  proof  is  the  scripture  (sdstra). 
Other  words  deal  only  with  matters  cognised  by  perception, 
inference,  etc.,  and  have  no  inherent  cogency;  if  they  give 
us  true  information,  it  is  merely  because  we  believe  the 
speaker  to  be  trustworthy.  Thus,  like  the  Vaisesika 
school,1  Prabhakara  holds  all  cognition  of  this  kind  to  be 
based  on  inference,  the  argument  being,  "  This  man  says 
something  ;  he  must  know  what  he  is  talking  about  ;  what 
he  says,  therefore,  must  be  true."  From  another  point  of 
view,  human  words  are  of  no  higher  value  than  re 
membrance,  which  is  admittedly  no  source  of  valid  universal 
judgments.  Thus  the  sole  possibility  of  the  validity  of 
verbal  testimony  lies  in  the  Veda,  which  has  no  author,  and 
therefore  is  not  vitiated  by  the  doubts  as  to  trustworthiness 
and  ability  of  correct  expression,  which  precludes  us  from 

*  Cf.  Nyayamanjari,  pp.  152  ff. 


42  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

according  implicit  belief  to  the  assertions  made  to  us  by 
any  merely  human  authority. 

There  is  an  obvious  difficulty  in  this  reasoning,  when  it 
is  remembered  that  Prabhakara,  like  the  Vrttikara,  insists 
on  the  self-evidence  of  cognitions,  from  which  it  would  seem 
to  follow  that  the  assertions  of  any  man  are  prima  facie 
valid,  until  sublated  by  better  evidence.  Kumarila,  who  is 
always  anxious  to  accommodate  the  views  of  the  school  to 
popular  beliefs,  is  at  the  same  time  more  in  harmony  with 
the  tenets  of  the  school  in  adopting  a  doctrine,  which  does 
not  involve  the  general  denial  of  the  validity  of  human  testi 
mony.  He  adopts,  therefore,  the  plan  of  distinguishing 
testimony  as  human  and  super-human  (apauruseya) ,  while 
admitting  both  as  valid,  though  for  different  reasons. 
In  the  case  of  the  Veda  there  is  no  author,  and  there 
fore  the  possibility  of  defects  is  absolutely  precluded. 
In  the  case  of  human  testimony  its  validity  may  be  impaired 
by  defects  in  the  speaker,  but  the  presence  of  excellencies  in 
him  precludes  the  presence  of  defects,  so  that  if  we  are 
assured  of  the  latter  we  can  be  assured  that  the  defects  do 
not  exist.  But  it  must  not  be  understood  that  the  excellencies 
positively  contribute  to  the  validity  of  his  utterances,  which 
they  possess  of  themselves;  the  excellencies  are  of  service 
merely  in  assuring  us  of  the  absence  of  those  defects, 
which  might  cause  his  testimony  to  be  suspect. 

The  Veda,  however,  has  special  claims  on  our  regard,  and 
the  Mimamsa  Sutra  (I,  1,  24-28)  meets  detailed  criticisms 
of  its  claim  to  eternity.  Thus  it  is  argued  against  its 
validity  that  parts  of  it  bear  names  of  men,  or  refer  to  human 
beings,  to  which  Jaimini  replies  that  passages  bear  names 
of  persons  who  studied  them  in  detail,  and  that  apparent 
human  names  in  the  Veda  are  really  mere  cases  of 
homonymns;  thus,  as  Sabarasvamin  points  out,  Pravahana 
is  not  the  name  of  a  man,  but  an  epithet,  "  The  excellent 
carrier."  Similarly,  apparently  absurd  statements,  such  as 
"The  cows  performed  a  sacrificial  session,"  are  to  be  under 
stood  merely  as  emphasising  the  value  of  some  ritual  action 
by  way  of  hyperbole,  not  as  showing  that  the  authors  of  the 
Veda  were  foolish  mortals.  The  eternity  of  words,  and  the 
fact  that  it  alone  serves  to  reveal  the  unseen  potency,  which 


THE  PROBLEM  OF  KNOWLEDGE  43 

results  from  obeying  its  injunctions,  are  conclusive  proofs 
of  the  eternity  of  the  Veda,  and  the  alternative  view  of  a 
creator  is  needless  and  unsatisfactory  both  in  regard  to  the 
Veda  and  to  the  world. 

Other  forms  of  proof,  both  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila 
expressly  reject.1  Sambhava,  which  is  variously  interpreted 
as  probability,  e.g.  that  ten  is  included  in  fifty,  or  much 
more  probably  as  inclusion  pure  and  simple,  is  regarded  as 
merely  a  form  of  inference.  Rumour,  which  like  Sambhava  is 
claimed  as  a  means  of  proof  by  the  Pauranikas,  is  patently 
useless  for  purposes  of  proof;  its  source  being  uncertain,  it 
is  quite  impossible  to  afford  its  contents  any  measure  of 
credit.  Gesture  (cesta) ,  which  is  given  as  a  means  of  proof 
by  the  Tantra  school,  the  Mimarhsa  ignores. 

The  relation  between  the  various  means  of  proof  is 
developed  by  Kumarila;  the  use  of  any  means  of  proof 
such  as  inference  is  debarred  if  there  is  a  more  direct  mode 
of  cognition,  e.g.  sense  perception,  or  if  the  contrary  of 
what  is  sought  to  be  established  is  established  in  advance  by 
the  use  of  some  simpler  means  of  proof. 

1  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  125,  126  ;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  64,  65  ; 
Slokavarttika,'  p.  492  (vv.  57.  58);  Tdrkikarahsd,  pp.  116,  117; 
SaddarSanasamuccaya,  p.  207. 


Ill 

THE  WORLD  OF   REALITY 

THERE  is  nothing  to  show  that  the  question  of 
the  reality  of  the  world  had  ever  occurred  to  the  framers 
of  the  Mlmdmsd  Sutra,  but  in  Sabarasvamin's  Bhasya  we 
find  the  problem  definitely  faced  in  answer  to  the 
onslaught  made  by  the  Nihilist  school  of  Buddhism  on  the 
whole  conception  of  the  reality  of  existence  as  we  know  it. 
The  doctrine  of  Nagarjuna,1  doubtless  an  effective  restate 
ment  of  tendencies  earlier  manifested  in  the  Buddhist 
schools,  denies  at  once  the  reality  of  the  external  world,  and 
of  the  ideal  world  which  seems  to  present  us  with  the  know 
ledge  of  external  reality.  That  much  of  its  dialectic  is 
sophistic  is  true,  but  its  novelty  of  view  and  the  energy  with 
which  Nagarjuna,  an  eastern  parallel  of  Zeno,  urged  his 
paradoxes,  evoked  from  the  orthodox  schools  elaborate  replies, 
both  the  Nydya  and  the  Veddnta  Sutras  seeking  to  refute 
heresies  so  dangerous  to  their  own  tenets.  The  reply  of  the 
Mimamsa,  in  keeping  with  what  appears  to  be  the  early 
character  of  that  Sutra  as  compared  with  the  Veddnta  or 
Nydya  Sutras  is  given  only  in  the  Vrttikara  as  cited  in  the 
Bhdsya.2  An  opponent  objects,  in  his  version,  to  the 
validity  of  our  waking  perceptions,  on  the  ground  that  in  a 
dream  we  have  cognitions  which  all  admit  to  be  without 
foundation,  and,  if  this  is  true  of  one  set  of  cognitions,  it  may 
be  assumed  to  be  equally  true  of  another.  The  reply  of  the 
Vrttikara  is,  in  effect,  that  the  argument  assumes  what  is  to  be 

1  Mulamadhyanmkakarika,  ed.  Bibliotheca  Buddhica,  1903-1913  ; 
Max  Walleser,  Die  Mittlere  Lehredes  Nagarjuna,  Heidelberg,  1911  and 
1912.  Cf.  SarvadarSanasamgraha,  ch.  II;  Sarvasiddhantasameraha, 
ch.  IV. 

1  Pp.  8-10. 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  45 

proved,  namely,  that  all  cognitions  as  such  are  invalid.  On 
the  contrary,  we  can  form  the  idea  of  the  invalidity  of  dream 
cognition  simply  from  our  having  waking  cognitions  which 
afford  us  a  basis  for  discrediting  the  dream  cognitions,  and  we 
can  explain  the  defects  of  dream  cognitions  by  the  assumption 
that  the  mind  in  dream  is  weak  and  does  not  act  effectively, 
a  view  which  we  can  support  by  the  fact  that  in  deep  sleep 
the  mind  is  wholly  absent,  suggesting  that  in  the  dream  state 
it  is  in  a  condition  intermediate  between  its  effective  waking 
presence  and  its  disappearance.  The  opponent,  however, 
continues  the  argument  by  urging  that  the  object  of  the  cogni 
tion  is  really  a  void,  thus  discrediting  the  validity  of  the 
cognition.  There  is,  he  says,  no  difference  between  the  object 
of  perception  and  the  idea;  the  idea  is  directly  perceived, 
and  there  is  nothing  in  reality  corresponding  to  an  external 
object.  The  Vrttikara  replies  that  this  view  rests  on  the 
erroneous  assumption  that  an  idea  must  have  a  form;  it 
really  is  without  form,  which,  on  the  other  hand,  the  external 
object  possesses.  What  we  perceive  is  not  our  idea,  but 
something  localised  as  outside  ourselves;  no  idea  can 
perceive  another  idea,  for  each  has  a  momentary  existence 
only,  whence  one  cannot  be  present  to  another.  The 
opponent  contends  that  the  second  idea  has  a  certain  con 
tinuity  with  the  first  ;  as  it  originates,  it  becomes  known  to 
the  first  and  reveals  to  it  the  object,  just  as  a  lamp 
illumines  and  thus  makes  known  things.  Or,  put  in 
another  way,  it  is  the  idea  which  first  originates,  and  then 
the  object  becomes  known,  having  no  anterior  real  existence. 
The  Vrttikara  refutes  this  by  insisting  that,  though  the  idea 
originates  first,  it  is  not  known  first;  as  we  have  seen,  the 
idea  is  known  by  inference  from  the  fact  of  our  cognition  of 
an  object,  and  the  actual  knowledge  and  the  knowledge  of 
the  idea  cannot  possibly  be  simultaneous.  Though  we  know 
an  object,  we  sometimes  say  we  do  not  know  it,  that  is,  that 
we  are  not  conscious  of  having  an  idea  about  it.  Further, 
ideas  are  essentially  connected  with  names,  while  perception 
is  essentially  immediate  knowledge,  in  which  naming  is  not 
necessarily  involved.  Moreover,  if  the  idea  and  the  object 
had  the  same  form,  as  is  assumed  in  the  opponent's  argument, 
this  would  sublate  the  idea,  not  the  object,  which  is  directly 


46  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

perceived,  but  in  truth  the  idea  is  formless  and  known  by 
inference,  while  the  object  is  endowed  with  form  and  is  an 
object  of  sense  perception.  Or,  again,  the  reality  of  an 
external  world  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  we  have  the  idea  of  a 
mat  only  when  threads  form  its  material  cause;  if  otherwise, 
then  a  man  might  form  the  idea  of  a  jar  despite  the  use  of 
threads  in  the  composition  of  an  object;  put  more  broadly,  our 
ideas  are  not  the  free  result  of  our  mental  activity;  they  are 
imposed  upon  us  as  regards  their  content  by  external  reality. 
The  argument  as  a  whole  thus  falls  into  two  parts,  the 
first  dealing  with  the  contention  that  ideas  have  no 
foundation  (nirdlambana) ,  and  the  second  with  the  view 
that  external  reality  is  void  (sunya).  Both  these  con 
tentions  are  the  tenets  of  the  Nihilism  of  Buddhism, 
and  there  is  no  real  ground  for  doubt  that  the  arguments 
of  the  Vrttikara  are  directed  against  this  contention. 
Kumarila,1  however,  or  some  predecessor,  has  interpreted 
the  passage  otherwise,  treating  the  first  part  of  the  argu 
ment  as  directed  against  the  Vijnanavada  of  Vasubandhu 
and  Asanga,2  which  admitted  the  reality  of  ideas,  while 
denying  that  of  the  outer  ^  world,  and  the  second  part  he 
treats  as  a  refutation  of  the  Sunyavada  of  the  Madhyamika 
school  of  Nagarjuna.  Precisely  the  same  fate3  has  over 
taken  the  corresponding  discussions  of  the  Sunyavada  in 
the  Nydya  and  Vedanta  Sutras;  Vatsyayana  still  interpreted 
the  former  (IV,  2,  25-33)  in  its  true  sense,  but  Vacaspati 
Misra  reads  into  part  of  it  an  attack  on  the  Vijnanavada; 
in  the  case  of  the  Vedanta  Sarhkara  turns  the  whole  pass 
age  (II,  2,  28-32)  into  an  attack  on  that  school,  while 
Ramanuja  treats  it  as  refuting  both  Buddhist  doctrines. 
The  causes  for  these  vagaries  of  interpretation  are  obvious ; 
the  Sunyavada  in  its  refutation  of  external  reality 
used  the  arguments  which  the  Vijnanavada  later  employed, 

1  Slokavarttika,  pp.  217-67,  268-345.    Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  141 
ff,  171   (a  fragment  only);  cf.  Nyayakanika,   pp.  253  ff,  Manameyo- 
dqya,  pp.  119-22;     NySyamanjarl,  pp.  536  ff  (Vijnanavada),  548  ff 
(Sunyavada) . 

2  Mahayanasutralamkara,  ed.  and  trans.  S.  Levi,  Paris,  1907-11  ; 
Sarvadarfanasamgraha,   ch.  I  ;  Sarvasiddh&ntasanigraha,  ch.  IV  (ii); 
SaddarSanasamuccaya,  pp.  40,  41,  47. 

'  •  Jacobi,  J.A.O.S.,  XXXI,  Iff, 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  47 

but  it  supplemented  the  conclusions  it  arrived  at  regarding 
external  reality  by  t  demolishing  the  value  of  our  ideas. 
Any  reply  to  the  Sunyavada  must  therefore  include  an 
answer  which  would  apply  to  the  Vijnanavada,  and 
later  authors  like  Kumarila  naturally  thought  that  the 
discussion  must  deal  with  the  more  recent  and  more 
convincing  school  of  Vijnanavada.  But  the  Vrttikara 
shows  no  knowledge  of  the  peculiar  terminology  of  the 
Vijnanavada,  such  as  its  distinction  between  the  Alaya- 
vijnana,  the  quasi-permanent  consciousness  which  constitutes 
the  individual  until  he  attains  Nirvana,  and  the  particular 
presentations  which  are  thence  derived  (pravrtti-vijndna). 
Moreover,  the  argument  from  the  dream  condition  is  not 
peculiar  to  the  Vijnanavada;  on  the  contrary  it  is  a  special 
favourite  of  the  Madhyamikas,  occurring  in  the  Mddhya- 
mika  Sutra  (VII,  34)  and  in  other  texts  cited  in  the  Vrtti 
on  that  text. 

The  view  of  Prabhakara  is  in  accord  with  the  Vrttikara 
and  iheBhasya,  but  Rumania's  interpretation  of  the  passage 
has  the  advantage  of  eliciting  from  him  a  most  interesting 
exposition  of,  and  attack  upon,  the  Buddhist  Vijnanavada 
and  Sunyavada  theories.  The  discussion  shows  the  close 
affinity  of  the  two  doctrines,  and  the  form  of  the  argument 
is  often  complicated  by  the  resort  to  elaborate  syllogistic 
reasoning,  but  the  whole  makes  a  very  creditable  effort  to 
refute  either  the  extreme  scepticism  of  the  Madhyamika  or 
the  extreme  idealism  of  the  Yogacaras.  The  reality  of  an 
external  world  is  vehemently  insisted  upon  as  the  only 
foundation  of  the  common  facts  of  life,  including  such 
distinctions  as  those  of  virtue  and  vice,  teacher  and  pupil. 
If  there  were  nothing  but  ideas,  all  our  views  would  be 
false,  since  they  essentially  rest  on  the  belief  in  external 
reality.  Moreover,  there  is  a  complete  counter  argument; 
cognitions,  we  hold,  have  real  substrata  in  the  external 
world ;  this  notion  of  ours  is  correct,  because  it  is  without 
contradiction,  like  the  notion  of  the  falsity  of  dream  cog 
nition.  If  you  reply  by  denying  the  validity  of  the  pro 
bative  example  which  we  adduce,  then  the  doctrine  that 
dream  cognitions  are  false  would  disappear,  and  you  would 
lose  the  chief  argument  adduced  against  the  reality  which 


48  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

underlies  cognitions  as  a  whole.  Moreover,  in  dream 
cognitions,  which  you  adduce  as  examples  where  there  is  no 
underlying  reality,  we  find  on  examination  that  there  is 
always  a  real  substratum,  however  much  distorted  and 
disguised.  If,  again,  you  argue  that  the  unreality  of 
our  waking  cognitions  is  revealed  by  the  fact  that  the 
Yogin  sees  reality  far  otherwise,  we  retort  by  denying  the 
validity  of  his  perception,  and  citing  against  him  the  visions 
of  our  Yogins.  Nor  can  we  accept  the  arguments  of  the 
Buddhist  logicians,  such  as  Dignaga,  who  assert  that  the 
activity  of  the  mind  can  supply  the  full  complement  of 
notions,  which  appear  to  us  to  reflect  reality;1  without  an 
external  world  all  these  mental  conceptions  would  be 
meaningless,  for  we  deal  not  with  conceptions,  but  with  the 
facts  of  life. 

Against  the  conception  that  cognition  alone  exists  to  the 
exclusion  of  cogniser  and  cognised,  Kumarila  contends  with 
special  energy.  The  case  for  this  conception  is  set  out  by 
him  with  much  care  as  the  prelude  to  his  reply  to  the 
Sunyavada.  It  rests  on  the  difficulty  of  understanding  how 
cognition  and  cognised  can  be  related.  There  cannot  really 
be  two  entities,  one  formless  and  one  possessing  form,  for  in 
memory,  when  no  object  is  present,  we  still  have  cognition 
of  form,  showing  that  the  cognition  has  form,  and  rendering 
the  hypothesis  of  an  external  reality  mere  superfluity.  How, 
again,  can  there  be  contact  between  the  incorporeal  cognition 
and  the  external  object  ?  An  object  can  be  perceived  only 
if  it  has  form,  but  again  the  form  does  not  exist  until  it  is 
perceived,  which  involves  contradiction.  Again,  even  if 
contact  were  possible,  how  could  two  things,  in  themselves 
without  form,  acquire  it  in  this  way  ?  Moreover,  the  idea 
we  have  of  a  double  moon  is  admittedly  erroneous,  and 
therefore  cannot  rest  on  reality.  So  also  we  use  a  variety  of 
words  of  varied  gender  for  the  stars,  and  a  masculine  word 
(dardh)  for  a  wife,  which  would  be  impossible  if  reality 
controlled  our  ideas.  The  same  thing,  e.g.  a  lovely  woman, 
raises  very  different  feelings  in  the  mind  of  the  ascetic,  the 

1  Cf.  RatnakaraSanti's  treatment  of  inference  as  internal  only, 
Antarvyaptisamarthana  (Six  Buddhist  Nyaya  Tracts,  pp.  103-14). 


49 

lover,  and  the  dog.  The  same  object  appears  to  us  in  one 
aspect  short,  in  the  other  long,  and  so  forth.  All  this  refutes 
the  possibility  of  an  external  reality.  The  true  theory  is 
one  suggested  by  the  doctrine  of  impressions,  which  the 
Mimamsa  itself  uses  to  explain  memory  and  dream  cogni 
tion.  There  is  one  thing  only,  the  cognition,  but,  as  the 
result  of  impressions  left  by  previous  cognitions,  there 
appears  the  distinction  of  cogniser,  cognised,  and  cognition, 
in  place  of  the  unity.  Each  idea  is  momentary,  but  it  can 
and  does  impress  its  successor;  there  is  no  substantial 
reality  like  the  soul,  but  a  never-ceasing  series  of  momentary 
ideas,  impressed  each  by  the  former,  gives  man  the  sem 
blances  which  we  regard  in  ordinary  life  as  the  outer  world 
and  the  soul. 

The  reply  of  Rumania  to  this  ingenious  suggestion 
emphasises  the  impossibility  of  belief  in  the  momentary 
character  of  ideas  and  the  continuance  which  the  theory 
requires.  If  each  idea  is  really  momentary,  and  perishes 
utterly,  as  the  Buddhists  assert,  how  can  it  affect  the 
subsequent  idea,  contemporaneity  of  ideas  being  negated  by 
the  Buddhist  theory?  How,  again,  can  impressions  create 
new  sensations,  as  opposed  to  mere  reviving  memories? 
How  can  the  essential  distinction  of  cogniser  and  cognised 
be  sublated?  How  can  each  cognition  in  an  interminable 
series  contain  in  itself  the  whole  of  the  past,  when  manifestly 
it  does  not  make  any  attempt  to  do  so?  In  what  sense  can 
our  cognition,  say  of  one  animal,  followed  by  that  of  another 
animal,  be  said  to  involve  the  conditioning  of  the  second  by 
the  quite  disparate  first?  We  have  many  cognitions  which 
are  not  the  result  of  impressions  at  all.  The  only  possible 
explanation  of  the  unity  and  continuity  of  our  mental 
life,  lies  in  the  recognition  of  a  substantial  unity  in  the  self. 

Kumarila  insists  that  no  idea  can  comprehend  itself, 
and  also  that  no  idea  can  be  comprehended  by  another. 
He  rejects,  therefore,  not  merely  the  Buddhist  view  but  the 
Nyaya-Vaisesika  conception  by  which  our  ideas  are  the 
object  of  mental  perception,  and  the  allied  Sautrantika1 

1  $addarSanasamuccaya,  p.  47  ;  SarvasiddhSntasarhgraha,  IV, 
ii,  1-7. 


50  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

speculation,  which  holds  that  the  form  of  the  object  is 
impressed  on  the  cognition.  The  objection  to  the  Nyaya- 
Vaisesika  view  appears  to  be  that  the  idea  is  understood  by 
the  school  to  be  perceived  simultaneously  with  the  object, 
and,  as  the  perception  of  the  idea  requires  that  it  should  be 
provided  with  visible  form,  that  is,  colour  and  extension, 
there  would  be  no  possibility  of  demonstrating  the  existence 
of  the  external  object,  since,  the  form  being  cognised  with 
the  idea,  an  external  reference  would  be  needless.  The 
objection,  it  must  be  noted,  is  not  cogent  against  the 
developed  form  of  the  Nyaya  doctrine,  in  which  it  is  held 
that  on  the  actual  cognition  (vyavasaya)  there  supervenes 
the  mental  perception  of  the  cognition  (anuvyavasdya) ;  the 
cognition  thus  brings  reality  immediately  before  the  mind, 
while  in  a  secondary  act  the  cognition  itself  is  made  the 
object  of  introspection,  as  in  the  accepted  theory  of  modern 
psychology.  The  Mnnamsa,  by  ignoring  this  possible  view, 
renders  it  necessary  to  hold  that  a  cognition  can  never  be 
the  object  of  introspection;  it  is  an  entity  which  is  inferred 
from  the  fact  of  cognition;  its  existence  is  known,  but  not 
as  an  object  of  sense-perception  of  any  kind.  Mental 
perception,  which  the  school  admits,  is  thus  restricted  to 
those  forms  of  mental  activity  which  are  not  cognitive. 

There  remains,  however,  yet  another  contention  of  the 
Sunyavada  which  Kumarila  seeks  to  refute.  It  is  based  on 
the  view  that  atoms  are  invisible,  that  aggregates  of  atoms 
are  invisible,  that  all  objects,  being  composed  of  such 
aggregates,  are  invisible  and  incomprehensible,  and  therefore 
void.  The  weight  of  this  argument  lies  in  the  fact  that  the 
Mlmamsa  gives  a  more  or  less  hearty  acceptance  to  the  doctrine 
of  atoms,  though  Kumarila  is  careful  not  to  bind  himself 
definitively  to  it.  The  conglomeration  of  atoms,  it  is  urged, 
is  impossible,  since  atoms  have  no  extension,  or  at  any  rate  no 
parts,  and  no  contact  between  them  is,  therefore,  conceivable. 
More  generally,  it  is  also  contended  that  no  whole  of  parts 
can  really  exist.  If  it  did,  it  must  either  reside  in  its  entirety 
in  each  of  the  component  parts,  which  is  positively  absurd, 
or  it  must  reside  collectively  in  all  the  parts;  in  this  event, 
even  if  it  can  be  assumed  that  it  is  something  over  and  above 
the  parts,  it  would  be  perceived  only  when  all  the  parts  had 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  51 

been  perceived,  which  would  be  normally  impossible,  abso 
lutely  so  in  the  case  of  a  whole  of  imperceptible  parts  like 
atoms.  This  dialectic,  which  the  Nyaya  Sutra  (IV,  2,  7-14) 
also  seeks  to  face,  is  met  with  the  argument  that,  as  there  is 
an  interminable  dispute  between  the  opposing  schools,  the 
Buddhists  who  deny  the  difference  of  the  whole  from  its  parts, 
and  the  Nyaya  who  assert  the  distinction,  the  safe  course 
lies  in  the  via  media  of  admitting  that  a  whole  is  in  one  sense 
different  from,  and  in  another  sense  not  different  from, 
its  constituent  parts.  A  whole,  therefore,  is  not  of  a 
simple  and  absolute  character,  and  resembles  an  object 
with  variegated  hues,  but  it  is  not  the  less  real  for 
that.  Invalidity  applies  to  doubtful  ideas,  not  to  ideas  of 
an  object  which  in  itself  is  not  absolute  in  character.  The 
stock  argument  of  the  Buddhists,  that  if  any  composite  thing 
is  investigated  no  whole  remains  after  deduction  of  the  com 
posing  parts,  e.g.  the  threads  of  a  mat,  is  met  by  the  rejoin 
der,  in  harmony  with  the  Nyaya,  that  the  same  result  is 
achieved  on  the  Nyaya  view,  which  regards  the  whole  as 
different  from  the  parts ;  the  whole,  in  their  view,  only  exists 
when  -there  is  an  agglomeration  of  parts;  if,  mentally,  you 
take  away  the  parts,  naturally  the  whole,  despite  its 
difference  from  the  parts,  disappears  also.  The  further 
hypothesis,  that  what  is  really  seen  is  merely  atoms  without 
real  unity  but  visible  in  numbers,  though  singly  invisible, 
is  naturally  rejected  as  devoid  of  cogency.  Finally,  the 
argument  is  used  that  the  attempt  to  ask  if  a  whole  resides 
in  the  parts,  as  an  entirety  in  each  or  collectively  in  all,  is 
mistaken.  The  whole  is  impartite,  and  the  idea  of  its 
relation  to  its  individual  constituents  in  whole  or  in  part 
is  a  question  which  arises  only  in  respect  of  the  individual 
elements,  and  is  meaningless  as  applied  to  the  whole.1 

The  value  of  Rumania's  refutation  of  the  Buddhist 
schools  is  not  inconsiderable;  he  brings  out  fully  the  grave 
difficulties  which  meet  any  effort  to  account  for  the  facts  of 
life  without  accepting  some  permanent  entity,  and  the  objec 
tions  to  the  effort  to  evade  this  problem  by  creating  the  fig- 

1  Slokavarttika,  pp.  632-34  (vv.  75-83) ;  cf.  Nyayamanjari,  p.  550  ; 
Avayaivinirdkarana  (Six  Buddhist  Nyaya  Tracts,  pp.  78-93), 


52  THE  KARMA-MlMAlVISA 

ment  of  an  unending  series  of  ideas,  each  of  which  must  be 
supposed  to  take  upon  itself  in  some  form  the  impressions  of 
the  whole  previous  history  of  the  series.  He  insists,  also 
rightly,  on  the  impossibility  of  accepting  any  purely  subjective 
idealism,  but  he  does  not  seem  to  have  appreciated  the  possi 
bility  of  discarding  this  attitude,  but  accepting  an  objective 
idealism.  A  suggestion  to  this  effect  was  implicit  in  the  doc 
trine  of  knowledge  adduced  by  Dignaga,1  which  insisted  that 
inference  and  other  mental  acts  dealt  with  ideal  contents,  but 
Kumarila  was  able  to  reply  to  this  doctrine  that  the  whole 
scheme  was  meaningless,  as  it  assumed  that  there  was 
nothing  truly  real  beyond  the  unreal  play  of  ideas  in  the 
mind.  No  true  objective  idealism  was,  therefore,  before  his 
mind,  and  he  is  content  to  assert  absolutely  the  reality  of  an 
external  world,  which  is  not  the  product  of  intellect,  but 
which  is  known  by  us,  the  relation  of  knowledge  to  reality 
being  of  a  peculiar  and  unique  type,  involving  an  activity 
on  the  part  of  the  cogniser  which  does  not,  however,  create 
the  object. 

In  their  positive  doctrines  as  to  the  nature  of  the 
universe  there  are  considerable  differences  between  Prabha- 
kara  and  Kumarila.  The  former  admitted,  it  is  clear,2  no 
fewer  than  eight  categories,  while  the  latter  accepted  five 
only.  They  agreed  in  regard  to  substance,  quality,  action 
or  motion,  and  generality,  but,  while  Prabhakara  accepted 
the  category  of  inherence  from  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  and 
added  the  three  of  potency  or  capacity  (sakti),  similarity 
(sddrsya),  and  number  (samkhyd) ,  Kumarila  rejected  the 
three  additions  of  Prabhakara,  and  also,  in  this  case 
in  agreement  with  his  predecessor,  the  particularity 
(visesa)  of  the  Nyaya-VaiSesika.  Finally,  inherence  was 
also  rejected  by  him.  On  the  other  hand,  the  texts  ascribe 
definitely  to  him  the  acceptance  of  the  category  of  non- 
existence  (abhdva),  with  a  fourfold  division  of  prior 
negation,  subsequent  negation  or  destruction,  absolute  nega- 

1  Slokavarttika,  p.  258  (v.  167) .  The  invalidity  of  all  but  indeter 
minate  perception  is  asserted  in  Saddarfanasamuccaya,  p.  41. 

a  Prameyaparayana  in  Mallinatha  Tdrkikaraksd,  p.  164  ;  Mana- 
meyodaya,  pp.  65,  114  ff ;  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  110,  111  (over 
looked  in  Prabhakara  School,  p.  89). 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  53 

tion,  and  mutual  negation,  sub-divisions  which,  of  course,  are 
simply  transferred  bodily  from  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  doctrine. 
Non-existence  stands  in  definite  opposition  to  the  other  four 
categories  accepted  by  Kumarila;  though  regarded  as  real,  it 
is  nevertheless  admitted  to  be  essentially  relative  to  the  four 
categories  of  being  (bhava).  Prabhakara,  however,  rejects 
non-existence,  as  might  have  been  expected  from  his  rejec 
tion  of  non-existence  or  non-apprehension  as  a  means  of 
proof.  The  only  reality,  in  his  view,  in  the  absence  of  a 
pot  from  a  spot  of  ground  is  the  spot  of  ground.  The 
particularity  of  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  which  serves  to 
differentiate  such  things  as  the  ultimate  atoms  and  selves, 
has  no  foundation  as  a  separate  category,  as  the  differentia 
tion  can  be  based  on  the  ordinary  qualities  which  these 
things  possess. 

Substance1  is  that  in  which  qualities  reside,  and  Prabha 
kara  reckons  the  number  as  nine:  earth,  water,  air,  fire,  ether, 
the  self  or  soul  (fitment),  mind,  time,  and  space.  Kumarila 
is  credited  with  admitting  also  the  substantiality  of  dark 
ness  and  sound,  while  others  accept  gold  as  a  twelfth.  Of 
these  earth,  water,  air  and  fire  all  possess  colour  and 
tangibility,  and  accordingly  are  the  objects  of  the  senses  of 
sight  and  touch,  but  only  when  in  non-atomic  form,  for  some 
degree  of  magnitude  is  recognised  by  Prabhakara,  as  by  the 
later  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  as  a  necessary  condition,  along  with 
touch  (sparsa) ,  of  proper  sense  perception.  The  other  five 
substances  cannot  be  regarded  as  perceptible,  since  they 
cannot  be  seen  or  touched,  and  therefore  are  only  inferred  to 
exist.  In  the  case  of  ether  the  apparent  whiteness  of  it  is 
due  to  particles  of  fire  in  it,  while  the  darkness  of  night  is 
not  a  substance,  nor  is  it  a  quality  ;  if  it  were  a  quality  it 
would  be  perceptible  by  day  also,  and  therefore  must  be 
deemed  to  be  merely  absence  of  light.  A  variant  of  this 
doctrine  in  the  school  of  Prabhakara  declares  darkness  to  be 
the  absence  of  the  knowledge  of  light.  Kumarila  claims 
darkness  as  a  substance,  because  it  is  blue  in  colour  and 
moves,  these  two  facts  being  necessarily  attributed  to  some 

1  PrakaranapancikG,  pp.  24,  54,  77,  84,  141  ff  ;  Manameyodaya, 
pp.  6ff,  66ff,'78ff  ;  Slokavarttika,  p.  404  (v.  183);  Tarkikaraksa, 
pp.  133,  134. 


54  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

substance,  but  the  Nyaya  denies  these  facts.  Pointing  out 
that  a  colour  can  be  perceived  only  in  light,  and  darkness  is 
experienced  when  there  is  no  light.  Sridhara  again  suggests 
that  darkness  is  the  imposition  of  blue  colour  on  something 
else.  The  necessity  of  inferring  ether  arises  from  the  nature 
of  sound,  which  must  be  provided  with  a  substratum;  unlike 
Kumarila,  Prabhakara  sees  no  sufficient  ground  to  give  to 
sound  the  rank  of  a  distinct  substance,  a  position  which  has 
obvious  difficulties  in  a  system  which  allots  so  pre-eminent  a 
place  to  the  word. 

Air,  in  Prabhakara's  view  is  neither  hot  nor  cold,  the 
apparent  heat  being  due  to  fire  particles,  and  the  coolness  to 
water  particles  diffused  in  it.  Kumarila  also  regards  it  as 
perceptible,  but  does  not  claim  that  it  has  any  colour;  he 
rejects  therefore  the  Nyaya  view  that  it  can  only  be  inferred, 
colour  being  necessary  to  perception,  and  adopts  the  later 
Nyaya  opinion  which  admits  of  direct  perception  through 
the  sense  of  touch.  In  this  and  in  many  other  details  his 
school,  if  not  the  founder,  clearly  largely  assimilated  the 
Nyaya- Vaisesika  physics,  though  it  is  clear  that  Kumarila 
himself  was  not  prepared  to  accept  the  atomic  theory  as 
absolutely  essential  to  his  principles.  Some  of  his  followers 
went  further,  and  claimed  that  ether,  space  and  time  were 
directly  perceptible,  but  on  these  points  the  doctrine  of  both 
schools  seems  never  to  have  been  developed. 

The  account  of  qualities  which  inhere  in  substances, 
and  are  distinct  from  motion,  given  by  both  Prabhakara 
and  Kumarila  shows  obvious  obligations  to  the  Vaisesika.1 
Prabhakara  gives  as  objects  of  perception  the  qualities  of 
colour,  taste,  smell,  and  touch;  number,  dimension,  indivi 
duality,  conjunction,  disjunction,  priority  and  posteriority; 
pleasure,  pain,  desire,  aversion,  and  effort,  and,  like  the 
Vaisesika,  distinguishes  conjunctions  and  disjunctions  ac 
cording  as  they  are  produced  by  the  action  of  one  or  both 
of  the  things  concerned,  or  rise  mediately  through  another 
conjunction  or  disjunction.  Kumarila,  like  Piasastapada, 
enumerates  twenty-four  qualities  :  colour,  smell,  taste, 

1  Prakaranapancikd,  pp.  54,  151  ;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  99-111  ; 
T6rkikaraksd,'p.  164. 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  55 

touch  ;  number,  individuality,  dimension,  conjunction, 
disjunction,  priority,  posteriority;  gravity,  fluidity,  viscidity; 
cognition,  pleasure,  pain,  desire,  aversion,  effort,  impression 
(covering  velocity,  elasticity,  and  mental  impression),  tone 
(dhvani),  which  is  a  quality  of  the  air,  revealing  sound, 
manifestation  (prdkatya),  a  quality  common  to  all  sub 
stances,  perceptible  and  determining  them,  and  potency. 
Potency  is  reckoned  by  Prabhakara  as  a  distinct  category; 
its  existence  is  proved  by  inference:  fire  burns  normally, 
but  under  the  influence  of  some  spell  it  ceases  to  have  that 
effect  ;  there  must,  therefore,  be  something  of  special  charac 
ter  in  the  fire  by  virtue  of  which  it  burns.  Words  al^o  have 
the  potency  to  denote  meanings,  and  so  on  ad  infinitum. 
It  is  eternal  in  eternal  things,  but  transient  in  transient 
things,  coming  into  being  with  them  and  disappearing  when 
they  disappear,  and  thus  differing  from  impression  (sams- 
kara),  which  even  in  eternal  things  is  evanescent.  The 
Nyaya  view  is  sensibly  opposed  to  the  recognition  of  any 
such  conception,  since,  strictly  speaking,  the  number  of 
potencies  in  any  object  might  be  regarded  as  very  numerous, 
negating  the  possibility  of  accepting  potency  as  one  quality 
or  a  distinct  category  of  being.  Number,  which  Prabhakara 
makes  a  separate  category,1  in  the  list  of  Kumarila  falls  to 
the  rank  of  a  quality.  The  classification  of  qualities  and 
their  assignment  to  substances  follows  generally  the  classifi 
cation  first  given  in  infinite  detail  by  Prasastapada.  From 
his  list  Kumarila  departs  only  in  the  substitution  of  tone  for 
sound,  and  of  manifestation  and  potency  for  merit  and 
demerit.  Unlike  Prasastapada,  he  denies  that  cognition  is 
the  object  of  mental  perception,  though  admitting  this  for 
the  other  special  qualities  of  the  self.  From  the  school  of 
Prabhakara  that  of  Kumarila  differs  in  asserting  that  indi 
viduality  applies  both  to  eternal  things  and  to  products, 
while  the  former  asserts  that  it  applies  to  eternal  things 
alone.  Priority  and  posteriority  apply  to  both  space  and 
time  ;  the  later  Nyaya  wisely  rejects  both  as  general  quali 
ties,  since  they  are  essentially  determinations  of  space  and 

1  In  Prakaranapancikd,  p.  54,  it  appears  as  a  quality  :  impression 
in  its  various  form  is  referred  to  (pp.  80,  81)  as  inferred  only  ;  the  full 
treatment  occurred  in  the  missing  Prameyaparayana  (seeibid.  p.  111). 


56  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

time,  or,  as  stated  in  the  Mdnameyodaya,  are  special  quali 
ties  of  these  entities. 

Action1  as  a  category  covers  only,  as  in  the  Nyaya- 
Vaisesika,  the  restricted  field  of  motion,  with  its  traditional 
five-fold  divisions,  as  throwing  up  or  down,  drawing  towards 
or  expanding,  and  motions  other  than  these.  But  Prabha- 
kara  maintains  that  it  is  only  an  object  of  inference,  while 
Kumarila  holds  that  it  is  perceived.  The  argument  of  the 
former  rests  on  the  fact  that,  when  we  think  we  see  motion, 
we  only  see  conjunction  and  disjunction  with  points  of  space, 
these  contacts  subsisting  only  in  outside  space  and  not  in  the 
moving  thing,  in  which  the  activity  of  motion  must  reside. 
The  reply  of  Kumarila 's  school  is  that  it  could  only  be 
inferred  as  the  immaterial  cause  of  the  conjunction  and 
disjunction  of  a  thing  with  points  in  space,  which  would 
mean  that  it  must  subsist  both  in  space  and  in  the  thing, 
whereas  it  exists  in  the  thing  only.  We  really  see  motion, 
which  is  in  the  thing  and  which  brings  about  conjunction 
and  disjunction  in  space,  a  doctrine  which  has  now  excellent 
modern  support. 

Generality  both  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  admit  as  real 
and  as  directly  perceptible  by  the  senses,  and  thus  set  them 
selves  at  variance  with  the  Buddhist  denial  that  there  is  any 
such  thing  as  generality.  The  first  Buddhist  argument  rests 
on  the  impossibility  of  the  existence  of  any  whole,  which 
both  schools  of  MImamsa  deny.  But  further  difficulties 
are  raised.  If  generality  is  perceptible  and  is  eternal,  as 
claimed  in  the  MImamsa,  the  absurdity  arises  of  perpetual 
perception.  Again,  how  is  generality  related  to  the  indivi 
duals;  is  it  present  in  its  entirety  in  each?2  If  so,  then 
there  are  as  many  generalities  as  individuals,  and  there  is 
mere  duplication  of  names.  If  not,  then  it  must  exist  in  all 
collectively,  and  therefore  be  entirely  unknown,  since  one 
can  never  know  all  the  individuals  which  make  up  a 
generality.  If  it  is  eternal,  and  exists  before  the  individuals, 

1  Prakiranapancika,  pp.   78-81  ;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  112,  113  ; 
a  wider  view  is  taken  in  £lokavdrttika,  ,p.  707  (v.  74). 

2  Prakaranapancikd,  pp.   17-32;   Slokavdrttika,  pp.  545-65,  614- 
39;  Mdnameyodaya,  pp.  95-99;  cf.  Nyayamanjarl,  pp.  297-324;  Aioka, 
Sdmdnyadusanadikprasdritd(Six  Buddhist  Nyaya  Tracts,  pp.  94-102) . 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  57 

it  ought  to  be  knowable  by  itself,  which  is  plainly  absurd;  if 
it  comes  into  being  with  the  individual,  how  is  it  distinct 
from  it?  The  reply  given  by  both  these  schools  is  an 
appeal  to  consciousness;  we  have  as  an  actual  fact  direct 
perception  of  generality,  and  we  cannot  be  induced  to  dis 
believe  it  by  any  process  of  inference,  which  cannot  have  the 
validity  of  direct  preception.  To  confute  our  belief  it  is 
necessary  to  adduce  some  defect  in  the  organs  of  perception 
or  a  sublating  cognition,  and  neither  of  these  processes  is 
possible.  The  Buddhists  would  ask  us  to  disbelieve  in  the 
existence  of  colour,  but  we  decline  to  do  so,  and  equally  we 
find  no  cogency  in  their  request  that  we  should  refuse  belief 
to  the  evidence  of  our  senses  regarding  generality.  Nor  is 
it  correct  to  ask  whether  generality  is  present  in  its  entirety 
in  each  individual  or  collectively  in  all;  these  are  concep 
tions  which  are  applicable  to  individual  things  alone,  not  to 
the  impartite  generality,  which  is  not  to  be  compared  either 
with  a  string  which  holds  together  a  necklace  of  pearls,  or 
the  many  parts  which  go  to  constitute  a  single  living  creature. 
It  is  not  to  be  considered  as  any  particular  configuration  or 
shape,  but  is  a  distinct  entity  sui  generis.  It  must  not  be 
thought  to  be  perceptible  apart  from  the  individual;  such 
an  existence  of  a  separable  character,  if  held  by  the  Nyaya- 
Vaisesika,  is  definitely  rejected  by  the  Mimarhsa.  In  the 
ultimate  essence,  when  we  analyse  our  idea  of  generality,  it 
rests  on  the  fact  that,  despite  differences  in  things,  we 
recognise  in  them  an  essential  identity;  among  cows  of 
many  colours  and  shapes,  there  is  still  the  same  nature. 
The  relation  of  generality  to  the  individual  may  be 
described  as  that  of  difference  as  by  Prabhakara,  or  as 
different  and  non-different  as  in  the  school  of  Kumarila, 
but  the  view  of  the  two  schools  is  not  materially  different. 
Kumarila  points  out  that  in  ordinary  life  we  recognise 
things  as  individual  or  as  generalities,  according  as  we 
select  the  one  or  other  of  the  two  aspects  which  must  always 
be  present.  The  specification  of  a  class  is  brought  about  by 
various  causes,  such  as  colour,  etc.,  or  time  and  place.  Thus 
gold  is  distinguished  by  its  colour  from  copper,  melted  butter 
from  oil  by  its  odour  and  taste,  a  jar  from  other  articles  by 
its  shape,  a  horse  by  its  neighing,  a  Brahman  by  origin, 


58  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

and  in  some  cases  by  action  also,  in  places  where  the  duties 
of  the  castes  are  duly  supervised  by  the  king.  Prabhakara, 
however,  declines  to  admit  of  generalities  such  as  Brahman- 
hood  and  Ksatriyahood,  which  Kumarila  accepts. 

Prabhakara  also  differs  from  Kumarila  in  his  use  of  the 
category  of  inherence  as  a  means  of  explaining  the  relation 
of  the  individual  to  the  generality.  When  a  new  individual 
of  a  class  comes  into  being,  what  is  produced  is  not  the 
existence  of  the  generality,  which  is  eternal,  but  of  the 
relation  of  inherence  between  the  individual  and  the  class. 
Inherence  differs  from  contact  in  that  it  does  not  presuppose 
the  previous  existence  of  the  things  affected  by  it,  and, 
unlike  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  Prabhakara  does  not  hold  that 
it  is  necessarily  eternal.  This  affords  an  easy  reply  to  the 
question  of  the  fate  of  the  class  character  on  the  destruction 
of  an  individual;  it  does  not  go  away,  as  it  has  no  motion;  it 
does  not  subsist  in  the  individual,  which  is  no  longer  in  being; 
it  does  not  cease  to  exist,  for  it  remains  in  other  individuals, 
but  the  inherence  between  the  class  and  the  individual 
comes  to  an  end.  But  Kumarila1  rejects  in  toto  the  idea  of 
inherence  as  a  true  category;  a  relationship,  he  argues,  can 
exist  only  between  things  which  are  established  as  distinct 
entities,  and,  as  inherence  is  supposed  to  be  a  relation 
between  things  which,  like  the  class  and  the  individual,  are 
inseparable,  it  is  a  contradiction  in  terms. 

While  Rumania's  school  admits,  as  usual,  the  existence  of 
generalities  of  substance,  quality,  and  action,  Prabhakara 
declines  to  accept  the  last  two  or  a  summum  genus  of 
existence  as  a  real  generality,  on  the  ground  that,  as  each 
generality  rests  on  the  fact  of  actual  perception,  the  genus 
existence  must  be  disallowed,  as  we  do  not  in  fact  perceive 
things  as  merely  existing.  The  true  sense  of  existence  is 
merely  the  individuality  of  things  (svarilpasattd)',  it  is  not 
a  true  class  character. 

Similarity2  as  a  category  is  asserted  by  Prabhakara,  who 
holds  that  its  existence  is  proved  by  our  consciousness  in 

1  Slokavdrltika,  I,  1,  4,  vv.  146-55  ;  cf.  ASoka's  Avayavinira- 
karana  (Six  Buddhist  Nyaya  Tracts,  pp.  78-86). 

*  Prakaranapuncika,  pp.  110,  111  ;  Slokavdrltika,  pp.  438-41 
(vv.  18-23),  565  (vv.  74-77)  ;  Tarkikaraksd,  p.  164. 


THE  WORLD  OF  REALITY  59 

precisely  the  same  way  as  every  other  category.  It  cannot 
be  held  to  be  substance,  for  it  exists  in  quality  and  motion 
as  well  as  in  substance.  It  cannot,  in  view  of  its  relation  to 
motion  and  to  quality,  be  a  quality;  motion  has  no  qualities, 
nor  can  a  quality  have  a  quality.  It  is  not  generality,  for 
no  comprehensive  conception  of  it  exists.  It  is  quite  other 
than  the  relation  of  inherence.  It  is  not  particularity, 
which  in  any  case  is  not  a  true  category,  since  it  is  no  more 
than  the  quality  of  individuality.  It  must,  therefore,  be  a 
distinct  category,  which  is  perceived  in  the  apprehension  of 
qualities,  motions,  or  parts  of  two  things  as  common  to  both. 
Kumarila's  rejection  of  this  category  is  based  on  the  fact 
that  similarity  admits  of  degrees,  e.g.  the  resemblance  of  a 
cow  and  a  buffalo  is  considerable,  that  of  a  cow  and  a  boar 
is  slight;  if  there  were  a  true  category  there  could  be  no 
degrees.  He  agrees,  however,  with  Prabhakara  in  regarding 
similarity  as  directly  perceptible.  It  consists,  in  his  view, 
in  the  fact  of  the  possession  by  two  objects  of  the  same 
arrangement  of  parts,  and  he  attributes  the  erection  of  a 
special  class  of  similarity  to  a  misunderstanding  by  the 
Vaisesikas  of  the  doctrine  of  Vindhyavasin,  which  merely 
asserted  that  generality  consisted  in  possession  of  unity  of 
form  (sdrupya),  which  was  taken  to  mean  likeness  (sadrsya). 
The  same  author  is  elsewhere1  cited  by  Kumarila  as  denying 
the  doctrine  of  the  existence  of  the  subtle  transmigrating 
body,  a  view  accepted  from  him  by  Kumarila,  and  as 
enunciating  the  principle  of  the  genesis  of  inference,  which 
is  accepted  also  in  the  Slokavarttika.  Who  this  author  was 
is  not  apparent;  he  cannot,  it  is  certain,  be  Isvarakrsna, 
nor  is  there  any  plausibility  in  identifying  him  with  the 
Vindhyavasa  who  plays  a  part  in  the  history  of  the  Samkhya, 
whether  or  not  he  was  really  Isvarakrsna.2  He  may,  of  course, 
have  been  an  older  teacher  of  the  Mlmamsa  school  itself. 

Cause  is  not  reckoned   by  either  school  as  a  category, 
a    fact    significant    of    the    curious     failure     of     Indian 

1  P_P.  704  (v.62),  393  (v.  143). 

2  Samkhya  System,  pp.  62,  69.  Gunaratna  (Saddarfanasa'-nuccaya 
p.  104) cites  a  £loka  of  Vandhyavasin  (!),  who  was  clearly,  in  his  view, 
not  I&varakr§na,  but  it  is  hard  to  say  of  what  value  his  evidence  is,  or  to 
whom  he  refers. 


60  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

philosophers  to  find  a  due  place  for  this  issue,  even  when,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  they  by  no  means  ignore 
its  importance.  But  there  seems  no  evidence  that  either 
Prabhakara  or  Kumarila  contributed  anything  of  novelty 
or  value  to  the  doctrine.  In  his  discussion  of  perception, 
as  we  have  seen,  the  former  makes  use  of  the  doctrine  of  the 
division  of  causes  into  the  material  or  inherent  (samavayi- 
kdrana),  and  immaterial  or  non-inherent  (asamavdyi) ,  a 
distinction,  doubtless,  taken  from  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika.1 
The  denial  by  Kumarila  of  the  conception  of  inherence 
would  have  precluded  him  from  adopting  such  a  distinction  of 
causes. 

Causation,  however,  affords  Kumarila  an  argument  in 
favour  of  his  thesis  of  the  reality  of  non-existence.2  That 
entity  he  classifies  as  prior,  as  the  non-existence  of  curd  in 
milk;  subsequent  or  destruction,  as  the  non-existence  of  milk 
in  curd;  mutual,  as  the  non-existence  of  the  horse  in  the  cow 
and  vice  versa;  and  absolute,  as  the  non-existence  of  a  horn 
on  the  head  of  the  hare.  Without  the  recognition  of  the  first 
two  kinds,  he  contends,  there  could  be  no  idea  of  causation : 
in  its  prior  negation  lies  the  character  of  the  curd  as  effect,  in 
its  destruction  that  of  the  milk  as  the  cause.  Everything  has 
two  aspects:  it  regards  its  self,  it  exists,  as  regards  anything 
else  it  is  non-existent;  and  both  these  aspect?  are  real  and 
necessary  to  each  other.  It  is  only  through  this  fact  that  we 
can  say,  "  There  is  no  jar  on  the  ground,"  or  that  we  can 
ever  differentiate  things,  which  is  possible  only  on  the  ground 
of  a  real  existence  of  non-existence.  It  is  impossible  to 
perceive  this  entity,  for  perception  must  deal  with  the  exis 
tent;  the  process  of  intellection  is,  therefore,  purely  mental; 
the  ground  is  seen,  the  jar  remembered,  and  then  ensues  the 
purely  mental  cognition  styled  negation,  which  must  be 
distinguished  from  inference  or  any  other  form  of  know 
ledge. 

1  It  may  be  noted  that  Salikanatha  commented  on  the  PraSasta, 
p&dabhasya  (Bodleian  Catalogue,  p.  244). 

1  Slokaz-drttika,  pp.  473-92  ;  Manameyodaya,  pp.  58-64,  114-18; 
cf.  Nyayamaf.jari,  pp.  49-63  ;  Saddarsanasamuecaya,  pp.  295-98. 


IV 
GOD,   THE  SOUL,   AND   MATTER 

THOUGH  the  MImamsa  is  so  deeply  concerned  with  the 
sacrifice,  it  has  no  belief  in  the  doctrine  that  the  rewards  of 
offering  are  to  be  expected  either  from  the  deities  to  whom 
the  offerings  are  directed  to  be  made,  or  from  a  God  as 
creator  or  apportioner  of  reward  and  punishment.  The 
sacrifice  generates  an  unseen  potency,  whence  the  goods 
desired  by  sacrificers  are  obtained  ;  the  Veddnta  Sutra 
(III,  2,  40)  expressly  negatives  the  idea  that  in  Jaimini's 
view  there  was  divine  intervention  in  this  regard,  and  the 
atheism  of  the  true  MImamsa  is  regarded  with  such  unani 
mity  as  to  render  it  impossible  to  explain  it  away.1  The 
full  development,  however,  of  the  doctrine  is,  as  usual,  to 
be  found  in  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila,  who  adopted  from 
the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  the  groundwork  of  their  views  of  the 
world,  but  declined  to  follow  that  school  in  its  speculations 
on  the  existence  of  a  creator.2 

The  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  accepting  the  doctrine  of  atoms 
on  the  one  hand  and  of  the  periodical  creation  and  destruc 
tion  of  the  world  on  the  other,  had  found  it  necessary  to 
introduce  the  conception  of  a  creator,  in  order  to  secure  in 
some  measure  a  mode  of  bringing  about  the  renewal  and 
destruction  of  the  combinations  of  the  atoms  and  their 
connection  with  souls.  But  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila 
alike  deny  absolutely  the  validity  of  the  belief  in  the  periodic 
creation  and  dissolution  of  all  things  ;  they  accept  a  con- 

1  As  does  Max  Miiller,  Six  Systems,  pp.  275-79  ;  cf.  K.  L.  Sarkar, 
Tagore  Law  Lectures,  1905,  p.  508. 

2  Prakaranapancikd,    pp.     137-40  ;    Slokavarttika,    pp.    639-80  ; 
Mdnameyodaya,  pp.   70-74;    cf.  Ny&yamanjari,    pp.    193-204;   Sad- 
darSanatamuccaya,  pp.  284  ff. 


62  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

stant  process  of  becoming  and  passing  away,  but  they  find 
no  ground  for  the  systematisation  of  the  process,  so  as  to 
produce  cycles  of  evolution  and  involution  of  souls.  Experi 
ence,  Prabhakara  urges,  shows  us  the  bodies  of  all  animals 
being  produced  by  purely  natural  means;  we  can  argue  hence 
to  the  facts  of  the  past  and  the  future,  and  need  invoke  no 
extraneous  aid.  Moreover,  the  whole  conception  of  God 
supervising  the  merits  and  demerits  of  men  is  idle;  God 
cannot  perceive  merit  or  demerit  by  perception,  since  they  are 
not  perceptible,  nor  by  the  mind,  which  is  confined  to  the  body 
which  it  occupies.  Supervision  also  is  impossible,  even  had 
God  the  necessary  knowledge  ;  it^must  take  the  form  either 
of  contact,  which  is  impossible  as  merit  and  demerit  being 
qualities  are  not  subject  to  contact,  or  inherence,  and 
plainly  a  man's  qualities  cannot  inhere  in  God.  If  the 
argument  is  adduced  of  the  analogy  of  the  carpenter,  it  may 
be  replied  that  on  this  basis  the  creator  would  have  to  be  an 
embodied  spirit,  and  no  embodied  spirit  can  affect  such 
subtle  things  as  the  atoms  or  merit  and  demerit.  Nor  is  it 
conceivable  that  the  atoms  should  themselves  act  under  the 
will  of  God,  for  no  parallel  to  such  activity  is  known  to  us, 
and,  if  it  were  possible,  it  would  follow  from  the  eternity  of 
the  will  of  God  that  creation  would  be  unceasing.  The  only 
true  case  of  supervision  known  to  us  is  that  exercised  by 
the  soul  over  the  body,  which  it  occupies  by  virtue  of  its 
merit  or  demerit,  and  there  is  no  need  to  hold  that  the  world 
is  more  than  an  ever-changing  sequence  of  things  affected  by 
the  souls  in  it. 

Rumania's  treatment  includes  both  an  elaborate  attack 
on  the  whole  conception  of  creation  and  a  special  refutation 
of  the  Vaisesika  views.  He  ridicules  the  idea  of  the  exis 
tence  of  Prajapati  before  the  creation  of  matter;  without  a 
a  body,  how  could  he  feel  desire  ?  If  he  possessed  a  body, 
then  matter  must  have  existed  before  his  creative  activity, 
and  there  is  no  reason  to  deny  then  the  existence  of  other 
bodies.  Nor  is  there  any  intelligible  motive  for  creation  ; 
granted  that,  when  the  world  exists,  conditions  are  regulated 
by  merit  and  demerit,  originally  there  was  no  merit  or 
demerit,  and  the  creation  of  a  world  full  of  misery  was 
inexcusable,  for  it  is  idle  to  argue  that  a  creator  could  only 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  63 

produce  a  world  in  which  there  is  sin  and  pain.  Yet,  if  his 
action  is  conditioned,  he  cannot  be  omnipotent.  If,  again, 
it  is  alleged  that  the  creation  was  for  his  amusement,  this 
contradicts  the  theory  that  he  is  perfectly  happy,  and  would 
involve  him  in  much  wearisome  toil.  Moreover,  there  is  no 
possibility  of  establishing  the  reality  of  his  creative  activity. 
It  could  only  rest  on  reports  of  the  first  of  created  men,  and  they 
could  have  no  power  to  testify  effectively  to  a  state  of  things 
existing  before  they  were  brought  into  being.  They  could 
only  rely  on  what  they  were  told  by  the  creator,  and  his 
assertions  might  be  mere  boasting.  Nor  is  it  at  all  satis 
factory  to  accept  the  belief  in  the  creation  of  the  Veda, 
which  by  no  means  enhances  its  value  ;  still  less  to  hold 
that  it  resides  with  the  creator  during  the  periodic  dissolu 
tions  of  the  world,  for  which,  again,  there  is  not  a  shred 
of  evidence. 

Against  the  Vaisesika  view  of  creation  exception  is 
justly  taken  to  the  difficulty  involved  in  holding  that  in 
some  manner  the  action  of  the  Supreme  Lord  brings  to  a 
stand  at  one  time  the  potencies  of  all  the  souls,  and  then 
awakens  them  all  when  a  new  creation  is  imminent.  Against 
this  view  it  is  contended  that  the  activity  of  men  arising 
from  their  past  deeds  can  never  cease,  and  it  is  absurd 
needlessly  to  complicate  matters  by  assuming  both  the  force 
of  men's  deeds  and  the  intervention  of  the  desire  of  God. 
Moreover,  it  is  impossible  to  explain  why  this  desire  should 
ever  arise,  and  unintelligible  to  elucidate  the  mode  in  which 
the  creator  can  act  without  a  body  or  acquire  a  body. 

Kumarila,  however,  does  not  content  himself  with 
refuting  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  doctrine;  he  attacks  equally 
the  Vedanta,1  on  the  simple  ground  that,  if  the  absolute  is, 
as  it  is  asserted  to  be,  absolutely  pure,  the  world  itself 
should  be  absolutely  pure.  Moreover,  there  could  be  no 
creation,  for  nescience  is  impossible  in  such  an  absolute. 
If,  however,  we  assume  that  some  other  cause  starts  nescience 
to  activity,  then  the  unity  of  the  absolute  disappears. 
Again,  if  nescience  is  natural  it  is  impossible  to  remove  it, 
for  that  could  be  accomplished  only  by  knowledge  of  the 

1  Cf.  Nyayamaftjari,  pp.  525-31. 


64  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

self,  which,  on  the  theory  of  the  natural  character  of 
nescience,  is  out  of  the  question.  Nor  is  the  Sarhkhya 
doctrine  of  many  selves  and  nature  any  more  tenable  as 
a  theory  of  creation.  The  beginning  of  creation  is  held  to 
be  due  to  a  disturbance  in  the  equilibrium  of  the  three 
constituents  which  make  up  nature.  But  how  can  such 
a  disturbance  take  place  at  a  first  creation,  when  there  are 
no  potencies  due  to  men's  actions  demanding  fruition? 
Even  at  subsequent  creations,  how  do  latent  potentialities 
by  themselves  become  fruitful  without  any  consciousness 
to  direct  them?  And,  if  they  do  attain  fruition,  the 
Sarhkhya  theory  of  liberation  by  knowledge  is  without 
value,  since  the  potencies  will  remain  able  to  come  again 
into  activity.  Knowledge,  it  must  be  recognised,  can  never 
give  freedom  from  bondage,  which  can  be  attained  only  by 
the  exhaustion  of  action,  for  which  the  Sarhkhya  metaphysics 
affords  no  adequate  possibility,  owing  to  the  infinite 
potentiality  of  nature. 

Though  the  existence  of  a  creator  is  denied,  the 
Mlmamsa  accepts  without  reserve  the  doctrine  of  the 
existence  of  the  self  or  soul,1  and  Sabarasvamin  elaborates 
the  case  for  its  existence;  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  both 
develop  the  theme  in  close  accordance  with  his  views. 
The  necessity  of  the  existence  of  the  self  for  the  Mimamsa 
rests  on  its  fundamental  assumption  that  the  sacrifices  are 
performed  to  secure,  in  many  cases,  a  reward  not  in  this  life. 
There  must,  therefore,  be  an  eternal  entity,  distinct  from  the 
body,  the  sense  organs,  and  cognitions,  which  is  both  the 
doer  of  actions  and  the  reaper  of  their  reward.  It  is  not 
unnaturally  objected  that  there  is  a  strong  presumption 
against  claiming  eternity  for  something  which  suffers 
change,  but  the  more  serious  objection  is  made  that  men  do 
not  realise,  when  they  reap  results,  the  actions  which 
brought  these  about,  thus  invalidating  the  value  of  the 
assumed  continuity,  and  that  there  is  nothing  unnatural  in 
a  man  determining  to  do  an  act  which  will  lead  to  evil 
results  in  the  future,  secure  in  the  knowledge  that,  when 


Sutra,   pp.  18-24  ;  Prakaranapancika,   pp.  141-60  ; 
Slokavarttika,  pp.  689-728  ;  Mdnanteyodaya,'pp.  78-84. 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  65 

these  results  come  to  fruition,  he  will  not  remember  their 
cause.  To  this  Kumarila  replies  that  remembrance  has 
nothing  whatever  to  do  with  the  matter;  the  wise,  who 
alone  are  worthy  of  sacrificing,  realise  in  all  their  actions 
the  law  of  retribution,  even  without  remembering  the  facts 
of  each  case.  Nor  is  it  any  argument  against  the  eternity 
of  the  soul  that  it  undergoes  modifications;  we  see 
in  actual  experience  abundant  evidence  of  changes  in  man's 
condition  in  life  without  any  cessation  of  the  substantial 
identity,  and  we  treat  death  as  no  more  than  a  change 
through  which  the  soul  endures.  The  sea  remains,  despite 
the  movements  of  its  waves;  the  serpent  uncoils,  without 
change  of  essence. 

To  the  theory  of  the  substantial  soul  the  Buddhist  at 
once  objects,  and  proposes  instead  the  doctrine  of  the  series 
of  ideas,  each  of  which  gathers  from  its  predecessor  the 
impressions  of  its  unending  past.  The  performer,  therefore, 
it  is  contended,  is  the  same  as  the  enjoyer,  but  this  contention 
Kumarila  rejects.  It  is  impossible  to  accept  this  view, 
he  argues,  unless  the  first  idea  and  the  last  in  the  series, 
from  performance  to  result,  have  a  common  substratum. 
Apart  from  the  fact  that,  if  ideas  are  really  momentary, 
there  can  be  no  interaction  and  no  series,  it  is  impossible  on 
the  series  theory  to  find  any  rational  basis  for  action,  since 
the  doer  will  clearly  not  reap  what  he  did,  and  action 
without  rational  ground  is  out  of  the  question  among  men. 
Moreover,  the  exact  character  of  transmigration  presents 
insuperable  difficulties  on  the  Buddhist  theory.  It  is 
impossible  for  an  immaterial  idea  to  move  about  in  a  living 
body,  much  less  to  transfer  itself  from  one  body  to  another. 
The  hypothesis  of  a  subtle  body  which  serves  as  an 
intermediary  between  one  life  and  rebirth  is  denied  by 
Vindhyavasin,  and  unsupported  by  any  evidence,  nor,  if  it 
existed,  is  it  clear  how  an  idea  would  pass  with  it.  Nor, 
again,  can  the  existence  of  an  idea  in  the  embryo  be  explained. 
The  embryo  has  no  sense  organs  and  cannot  have  cognitions, 
and  an  idea  is  never  known  to  exist  save  in  the  form  of  a 
cognition.  Nor  can  it  be  supposed  that  the  idea  exists  as 
a  latent  potentiality  in  the  embryo  without  a  substratum, 
while,  if  the  sense  organs  are  assumed  to  be  the  substratum, 

5 


66  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

then  they  would  possess  intelligence,  and  rebirth  would 
become  impossible,  since  on  their  destruction  intelligence 
would  go  also;  further,  the  share  played  by  the  organs  in 
developing  the  idea  would  contradict  the  Buddhist  doctrine 
that  the  idea  arises  from  a  preceding  idea  only.  Nor  is 
there  any  evidence  that  the  first  cognition  of  the  newborn 
child  is  due  to  a  previous  idea;  we  hold  that  it  arises  from 
the  functioning  of  the  sense  organs.  There  must,  therefore, 
be  something  which  possesses  the  potentiality  of  ideas,  is 
eternal,  and  capable  of  transmigration.  This  need  is 
furnished  by  the  soul,  which  is  immaterial  and  omnipresent, 
and  thus,  without  motion,  is  able  to  connect  itself  with  one 
body  after  another. 

The  soul,  then,  is  essentially  active,  for,  unlike  the 
Vaisesika  school,  the  MImamsa  does  not,  according  to 
Kumarila,  deem  that  motion  is  the  only  form  of  action,  and 
it  is  through  its  superintending  activity  that  the  motions  of 
the  body  are  achieved.  We  must,  therefore,  conceive  the  soul 
engaged  from  time  immemorial  in  the  work  of  directing 
a  body,  the  acts  done  in  each  life  determining  the  character 
of  the  body  attained  in  the  next,  a  process  which  will  cease 
only,  if  ever,  when  the  soul  ceases  to  obtain  a  bodily 
habitation. 

Again,  from  another  point  of  view  the  Buddhist  conception 
of  a  series  is  imperfect.  Granted  that  it  is  impossible  to 
establish  a  soul  merely  on  the  ground  of  such  attributes  of 
the  soul  as  pleasure,  desire,  or  memory,  adduced  by  the 
Vaisesika  school  as  indications  of  the  existence  of  the  soul, 
since  these  might  be  explained  on  the  theory  of  impressions, 
no  such  explanation  is  available  to  dispose  of  the  cognition 
of  the  self.  In  the  case  of  the  two  judgments,  "  I  knew  " 
and  "  I  know,"  the  theory  of  ideas  breaks  completely  down. 
The  first  idea  cannot,  as  past,  know  the  later  idea,  nor  can 
the  later  idea  know  the  first.  It  is  useless  to  appeal  to  a 
series,  for  the  series  was  not  present  at  the  first  cognition, 
nor  is  it  present  at  the  last.  Nor  is  there  any  unity  in  the 
two  cognitions,  for  the  Buddhist  refuses  to  recognise  any 
classes.  Nor  can  it  be  argued  that  similarity  would  suffice, 
for  in  cognitions  of  different  objects,  e.g.  a  horse  and  a  cow, 
there  is  no  similarity  of  cognition.  The  bare  fact  of  each 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  67 

being  in  one  aspect  a  cogniser  would  at  most  give  merely 
the  bare  recognition  that  there  was  a  cogniser,  but  no 
personal  identity.  A  true  permanent  substance  is,  therefore, 
essential,  and  such  a  substance  explains  far  more  effectively 
than  any  other  hypothesis  such  phenomena  as  desire, 
memory,  and  pleasure  and  pain,  while  it  is  the  indispensable 
basis  of  merit  and  demerit. 

This  permanent  entity  is  quite  distinct  from  the  body, 
the  senses,  or  cognition.  The  elements  of  the  body  are 
seen  to  be  without  intelligence,  and  the  combination  of 
such  elements  cannot  produce  intelligence.  If,  again,  one 
element  alone  had  this  nature,  the  others  could  not  coalesce 
with  it  to  form  a  body.  A  dead  body,  which  consists 
of  precisely  the  same  material  as  the  living  body,  contains 
no  intelligence.  On  the  contrary,  the  fact  that  a  body  is  an 
organised  whole  suggests  irresistibly  the  fact  that  it  serves 
the  purpose  of  another  which  directs  it,  namely,  the  soul. 
Such  phrases  as  "  I  am  fat,"  or  "  I  go,"  are  merely  natural 
transfers  of  use.  On  the  other  hand,  the  phrase  "  My  body  " 
shows  clearly  that  the  ego  and  the  body  are  different. 
The  same  argument  can  be  applied  to  the  case  of  the 
sense  organs,  but  others  are  also  available;  thus  the  fact 
that  I  feel  with  my  hand  what  I  see  with  my  eyes  shows 
that  there  is  something  beyond  the  sense  organs.  Again,  a 
blind  man  remembers  what  he  saw  when  his  eyesight 
remained,  which  would  be  impossible  if  the  organ  were  the 
self.  More  generally  the  analysis  of  any  cognition  reveals  to 
us  the  fact  that  the  "  I  "  is  not  the  body,  nor  the  sense  organs 
nor  the  cognition  itself,  but  something  over  and  beyond. 
Many  people  can  have  the  same  cognition  as  far  as  content 
is  concerned,  but  each  cognition  has  an  individual  refer 
ence,  as  is  seen  also  with  perfect  clearness  in  the  facts  of 
memory;  if  there  were  no  "  I  ",  how  could  we  have  the  fact 
that  one,  who  has  learned  half  a  lesson  at  one  time,  can 
later  on  resume  the  task  at  the  place  at  which  he  left  off  ? 
The  objection,  that  the  terms  "  My  soul  "  indicate  a  differ 
ence  between  the  "  I  "  and  the  soul,  is  met  by  holding  that 
in  the  word  "soul"  the  meaning  "cognition"  is  to  be 
understood,  cognition  often  being  inaccurately  described  as 
the  soul.  The  result  can  be  confirmed  by  the  evidence 


68  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

of  the  Samhitas  and  Brahmanas,  the  former  of  which 
implicitly,  the  latter  explicitly,  recognise  the  existence  of 
the  eternal  soul. 

There  must,  however,  be  something  to  mediate  between 
the  eternal  and  omnipresent  soul  and  the  world,  else  its 
knowledge  would  be  eternal  and  omniscient,  as  emphati 
cally  it  is  not.  The  mediator  is  furnished  by  mind,  whose 
contact  with  the  soul  is  the  essential  condition  for  its  con 
sciousness  in  all  its  forms.  For  this  contact  it  is  necessary 
that  mind  should,  in  contrast  to  soul  which  is  omnipresent, 
be  atomic,  and  possess  the  capacity  of  extremely  rapid 
motion,  a  fact  which  makes  our  experiences,  even  when 
truly  successive  as  they  are,  appear  on  occasion  to  be  simul 
taneous.  Mind,  however,  can  exist  only  in  a  body,  which 
the  soul  must  ensoul,  and  then  through  it  the  soul  comes  into 
contact  with  the  outer  world  by  means  of  the  sense  organs. 
Through  the  contact  of  external  objects  with  the  sense 
organs,  mediated  by  the  mind,  the  soul  appreciates  the  outer 
world  ;  the  mind  directly  conveys  to  it  knowledge  of  plea 
sure,  pain,  desire,  aversion  and  effort,  which  are  among  its 
qualities.  It  possesses  further  qualities :  cognition,  which  is 
self  cognised  in  the  terminology  of  Prabhakara  or,  as 
Kumarila  has  it,  inferred  ;  merit  and  demerit,  which  are 
inferred  ;  and  impression  (samskdra),  which  is  produced 
by  apprehension  and  results  in  memory,  from  whose  opera 
tions  it  is  inferred.  The  principle  of  impression,  more 
over,  really  applies  to  merit  and  demerit,  for  these  exist  in 
the  form  of  impressions  of  past  activities,  and  can  hardly 
be  said  to  be  separate  qualities,  since  they  merely  sum  up 
in  terms  of  moral  value  the  nature  of  the  accumulated 
impressions  ;  hence,  though  they  appear  as  distinct  elements 
in  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika  lists,  one  list  of  qualities  attri 
buted  to  Kumarila  more  logically  leaves  out  merit  and 
demerit.  Further,  the  soul  possesses  *he  common  qualities 
of  number,  namely,  unity  ;  individuality;  dimension  as 
omnipresent  as  opposed  to  atomic,  or  of  the  same  size 
as  the  body  as  held  by  the  Jains;  and  conjunction  and 
disjunction  with  mind.  Nothing  is  more  obscure  than 
this  relation  between  the  soul  and  the  mind.  It  is  said  to 
be  brought  about  by  merit  and  demerit,  but  it  is  obvious 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  69 

that  it  is  also  affected  by  the  activity  of  the  soul,  which  is 
never  regarded  as  merely  passive  in  its  attitude  to  mind. 
The  impossibility  of  expressing  the  relationship  intelligibly 
is  inherent  in  the  effort  to  bridge  the  gulf  between  the 
material  and  the  immaterial  worlds.  But  it  is  curious  that, 
as  in  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika,  there  is  no  real  attempt  in  the 
Mlmamsa  to  explain  in  what  way  mind  is  active  in  the 
processes  of  reasoning.  It  is  obvious  that  inference,  and 
the  other  means  of  proof  apart  from  sense  perception,  must  be 
due  to  the  activity  of  mind  in  contact  with  the  soul,  but 
insistence  on  the  part  of  mind  in  the  direct  perception  of 
pleasure,  pain,  desire,  aversion,  and  effort  has  apparently 
resulted  in  obscuring  the  essential  part  which  it  must  be 
deemed  to  play  in  the  higher  mental  activities,  if  for  no 
other  reason  than  that  they  all  rest,  save  verbal  cognition 
and  negation,  on  sense  perception  as  an  ultimate  basis,  and 
even  verbal  cognition  and  negation  must  be  mediated  to  the 
soul  by  mind. 

The  soul,  then,  with  the  aid  of  the  mind,  is  the  enjoyer 
of  all  experience;  the  sense  organs  the  instruments;  the 
objects,  external  or  internal,  the  world  and  the  qualities  of 
the  soul;  and  the  body  is  the  abode  of  the  sense  organs  and 
the  mind,  through  whose  instrumentality  the  soul  has  experi 
ence.  Of  bodies  Prabhakara  recognises  three  kinds  only — 
womb-born,  egg-born  and  sweat-born — omitting,  with  some 
Nyaya-Vaisesika  authorities,  the  vegetable  body,  on  the 
ground  that  its  possession  of  sense  organs  is  not  established, 
despite  the  Jain  views  on  this  topic.  None  but  earth  bodies 
are  accepted  by  Prabhakara,  though  the  Nyaya-Vaisesika 
accepts  the  existence  in  other  worlds  of  water  bodies,  fire 
bodies  and  air  bodies;  this  excludes  the  Vedanta  view,  which 
finds  in  the  body  five  or  three  elements  or  the  variant  which 
admits  of  four  only.  The  body,  however,  in  any  event  is 
essentially  subservient  to  the  soul,  which  acquires  a  body  in 
accordance  with  its  past  deeds;  in  what  manner  this  is 
accomplished  neither  Prabhakara  or  Kumarila  tell  us,  for 
in  truth  the  problem  is  incomprehensible. 

So  far  the  views  of  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  seem  to 
be  in  general  harmony,  but  there  is  a  distinct  discrepancy, 
if  not  a  very  important  one,  in  their  view  of  the  manner  in 


70  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

which  the  soul  is  cognised.  In  the  view  of  Prabhakara  the 
cognition  is  self-illumined,  but  this  doctrine  is  not  applicable 
to  the  soul.  The  Vedanta  view,  of  course,  insists  on  the 
doctrine  of  self-illumination  in  the  case  of  the  cognition 
and  the  soul  as  consciousness  alike;  Prabhakara  objects  that 
in  this  case  the  soul  must  be  present  in  consciousness 
during  the  state  of  deep  sleep  no  less  than  during  the  waking, 
dreaming  and  fourth  states,  and,  as  all  our  consciousness 
can  be  explained  by  hypothesis  of  the  self-illumination  of 
cognition,  it  is  needless  to  assume  any  other  self-luminous 
object.  The  Nyaya  view,  which  makes  the  soul  to  be  the 
object  of  direct  perception,  as  opposed  to  the  Vaisesika 
doctrine  of  the  inferring  of  the  soul,  which  is  also  found  in 
older  Nyaya,  is  rejected  by  Prabhakara  on  the  ground  that 
it  serves  to  make  the  perceived  also  the  perceiver,  which  is 
in  his  view  absurd,  a  position  for  which  there  is  clearly 
much  better  ground  than  in  the  cognate  case  of  the  denial 
of  the  mental  perception  of  cognition.  The  theory  which 
he  adopts  is,  then,  simply  that  in  every  cognition  the  soul 
enters  into  the  cognition  as  a  necessary  element,  and,  therefore, 
in  a  sense  the  soul  is  cognised  by  the  same  means  of  valid 
cognition  as  the  objects  which  it  knows.  But,  while  the 
soul  is  thus  cognised,  it  is  not  cognised  as  a  true  object;  it 
is  cognised  as  the  agent  in  cognition,  just  as  a  man  who  walks 
is  the  agent  of  walking,  not  the  object.  The  soul,  therefore, 
is  the  substratum  of  the  self-illumined  cognition,  into  which  it 
enters  in  the  element  of  "  I,"  and  this  fact  explains  why  in 
deep  sleep  there  is  no  self-consciousness,  since  at  that  time 
there  is  no  cognition,  and  the  soul  can  be  known  only  along 
with  a  cognition.  But  the  fact  that  there  is  no  cognition 
does  not  mean  that  there  is  no  soul:  consciousness  is  not,  as 
in  the  Vedanta,  the  essence  of  the  soul,  but  a  mere  quality 
of  it,  and  in  the  state  of  liberation  the  soul  remains  eternally 
existent,  though  by  ceasing  to  have  cognitions  it  ceases  to  be 
cognised.  While  this  view  of  the  knowledge  of  the  soul  in 
self-consciousness  is  ingenious  and  not  unhappy,  laying  as 
it  does  due  stress  on  the  necessary  implication  of  the  self  in 
consciousness,  it  is  a  little  difficult  to  see  why  Prabha 
kara  did  not  admit  that  the  soul  was  self-illumined,  which 
is  certainly  the  natural  interpretation  of  the  Sabarabhasya 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  71 

(p.  22).  That  terra  seems  to  apply  more  readily  to  the  soul 
than  to  cognitions  on  his  own  theory,  in  which  the  cognition 
seems  really  to  be  inferred,  as  it  actually  is  held  to  be  by 
the  school  of  Rumania. 

How  far  Kumarila  really  differs  from  Prabhakara  in 
these  views  is  not  clear.  He  certainly  is  credited  by  such 
texts  as  the  Sdstradlpikd  (p.  101)  and  the  Sarvasiddhanta- 
samgraha  (VIII,  37)  with  the  view  that  the  self  is  the  object 
of  direct  perception  by  the  mind,  a  view  ascribed  by  the 
Nydyamanjarl  (p.  429)  to  the  Aupavarsas,1  and  this  is 
perhaps  a  legitimate  deduction  from  the  doctrine,  which  he 
certainly  held,  that  the  existence  of  the  self  is  established 
through  the  notion  of  "  I."  The  soul  he  holds  to  be  the 
substratum  of  the  "  I "  element  in  cognition,  and  this 
appears  to  be  practically  identical  with  Prabhakara's  view 
that  the  soul  is  the  substratum  of  the  self-illumined  cogni 
tion,  and  the  "  I  "  element  in  it.  Kumarila,  however, 
adopts  in  the  Tantravarttika2  the  doctrine  that  the  soul 
is  pure  consciousness,  though  he  distinguishes  it  from  cogni 
tion,  but  this  characteristic  is  hardly  more  than  a  verbal 
deviation  from  the  view  of  Prabhakara,  as  far  as  practical 
results  go. 

Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  are  agreed  as  to  the  fact  of 
there  existing  a  multitude  of  separate  souls,  as  is  the  neces 
sary  supposition  of  the  Sutra  and  the  theme  of  the  Bhdsya. 
The  perception  of  another  soul  is  obviously  impossible,  but 
one  sees  the  activities  of  other  bodies,  and  infers  thence  that 
they  must  be  ensouled,  just  as  one's  own  body  is  ensouled. 
Thus,  if  a  pupil  has  learned  half  his  task  in  one  day,  the 
fact  that  he  continues  to  learn  the  next  half  the  next  day 
is  a  good  ground  for  assuming  that  he  possesses  a  soul. 
The  same  result  can  be  arrived  at  from  the  fact  that  merit 
and  demerit  are  infinitely  various,  and  not  one,  as  they 
must  be  if  there  were  one  soul  only.  The  objection  that 
pain  is  felt  as  localised,  though  there  is  but  one  soul  in  the 
body,  is  met  by  insisting  that  in  reality  the  feeling  is  in  the 
soul,  and  it  is  only  the  cause  of  the  pain  which  can  be  said 

1  Cf.  Mdnameyodaya ,  p.  80.     But  in  Slokavdrttika,   p    525  (vv. 
142,  143),  he  seems  to  accept  self-illumination  from  the  Bhdsya. 
»  Trans.,  p.  516  ;  so  Slokavdrttika,  p.  187  (v.  167), 


72  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

to  be  localised.  The  further  Vedanta  contention,  that  the 
sun,  though  one,  appears  by  reflection  in  different  substances 
to  be  endowed  with  diverse  qualities,  is  also  rebutted  by  the 
observation  that  the  qualities,  which  appear  different,  do  not 
really  belong  to  the  sun  but  to  the  reflecting  medium.  On  this 
analogy  the  different  qualities  appearing  in  connection  with 
the  soul  would  belong  to  the  bodies  which  are  ensouled,  and 
this  conclusion  is  manifestly  contrary  to  fact,  since  cognition, 
etc.,  are  qualities,  as  we  have  seen,  of  soul,  not  of  body.  It 
is  characteristic,  however,  of  the  tendency  to  import  Vedanta 
conceptions  into  the  Mimamsa  that  the  Sarvasiddhanta- 
samgraha  (VIII,  39)  asserts  categorically  that  there  is  one 
real  supreme  self,  of  which  the  individual  selves  are  unreal 
differentiations. 

Such  being  the  nature  of  the  soul  of  man,  his  normal  lot 
is  to  continue  in  an  unending  cycle  of  lives,  each  determined 
from  the  outset  by  his  actions  in  previous  lives,  unless  he 
adopts  the  path  which  leads  to  freedom  from  this  round  of 
existence.  The  process  of  this  liberation  is  sketched  by 
Prabhakara ;  first  the  man  becomes  disgusted  by  the  troubles 
which  attend  this  mortal  life;  then  he  realises  that  even  the 
pleasures  of  this  life  are  inseparable  from  pain,  both  in 
their  attainment  and  in  their  disappearance;  accordingly  he 
devotes  his  mind  to  seeking  final  release  from  all  worldly 
things.  To  this  end  he  abstains  from  all  prohibited  acts, 
which  lead  to  punishment  hereafter,  and  also  from  all  acts 
which  are  undertaken  for  the  purpose  of  attaining  some 
worldly  or  heavenly  guerdon.  He  also  exhausts  the  accumu 
lated  store  of  his  merit  and  demerit  by  undergoing  the 
experiences  which  result  thence.  Finally  he  destroys 
the  receptacle  of  experience  by  the  knowledge  of  the 
soul,  together  with  such  concomitants  as  contentment, 
self-restraint  and  so  forth,  all  things  enjoined  by  the 
scriptures  to  prevent  the  return  of  the  soul.  When  all  this 
is  accomplished,  then  the  achievement  of  release  is  brought 
about.  Prabhakara  insists  that,  as  the  texts  enjoin  the  know 
ledge  of  the  soul  for  no  ulterior  purpose,  it  must  be  understood 
that  the  absence  of  rebirth  is  the  reward  of  this  knowledge. 
Liberation  thus  consists  in  the  cessation  of  the  operation  of 
merit  or  demerit,  and  in  total  freedom  from  the  body. 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  73 

Liberation  is  purely  negative  in  character;  the  soul  exists  as 
a  mere  existence  without  cognition,  and  without  either 
pleasure  or  pain,  both  of  which  are  essentially  connected 
with  the  presence  of  the  soul  in  the  body.  The  existence 
thus  achieved  is  thus  like  that  attained  in  the  view  of  the 
Vaisesika,  the  condition  enjoyed  by  a  stone  as  the  author  of 
the  Sarvasiddhantasamgraha  maliciously  points  out. 

Rumania's  views  are  largely  in  harmony  with  those  of  Pra- 
bhakara;  thus  he  holds  that  liberation  cannot  be  supposed  to 
be  bliss  in  any  form,  which  is  essentially  transient  and  unreal. 
But,  consistently  with  the  main  aim  of  the  Mimamsa,  he 
cannot  admit  that  the  Vedic  texts,  which  seem  to  connect 
freedom  from  return  with  knowledge  of  the  soul,  mean  that 
knowledge  produces  directly  this  result.  This  would  con 
flict  with  the  criticisms  urged  by  him  against  the  Samkhya 
that  they  erroneously  hold  that  knowledge  by  itself  can 
terminate  bondage;  it  is,  on  the  contrary,  only  possible  to 
counteract  the  accumulated  result  of  past  deeds  by  working 
off  the  consequences;  the  function  of  knowledge,  therefore, 
may  prevent  further  accumulation  of  merit  and  demerit;  it 
cannot  annul  what  has  been  accumulated.  So  Kumarila 
attaches  only  an  indirect  value  to  knowledge  of  the  self  as  a 
factor  in  sacrificial  performance;  in  the  first  place,  it  serves 
to  induce  men  to  undertake  sacrifices  in  cases  where  they 
would  not  else  be  willing  to  do  so,  for  they  understand  the 
distinction  of  soul  and  body  and  the  spiritual  advantages 
of  sacrificing.  In  the  second  place,  through  such  knowledge 
men  learn  to  perform  the  regular  offerings,  including  not 
merely  the  fixed  offerings  but  those  for  special  occasions  and 
penances,  with  the  aim  merely  of  avoiding  the  sin  which 
arises  from  non-performance,  and  without  any  desire  for  the 
advantages  accruing  therefrom.  It  is  agreed  that  men  who 
do  not  desire  the  results  of  such  sacrifices  do  not  obtain 
them,  a  doctrine  which,  of  course,  is  familiar  in  another 
application  from  the  Bhagavadglta.  Thus,  then,  by  this 
means  the  actions  of  past  lives  are  worked  out,  while 
no  new  action  is  accumulated,  and  the  man  becomes 
ready  for  final  release  in  the  shape  of  perpetual  freedom 
from  corporeal  attachment.  The  final  condition,  then,  of 
man  will  be  the  persistence  of  pure  consciousness,  but 


74  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

without  cognition  or  feeling  of  any  sort.  This  view,  though 
in  entire  harmony  with  the  Mimamsa,  has  suffered  the  usual 
fate  at  the  hands  of  the  later  texts,1  in  which  it  is  asserted 
that  the  final  condition  of  man  is  a  state  of  constant  bliss. 

In  what  manner  then  does  the  performance  of  sacrifice 
operate  as  affecting  the  soul?  The  Mimamsa  in  both 
schools  is  confident  that  there  is  no  question  of  rewards 
coming  from  the  deity  to  whom  the  offerings  are  made;  no 
deity  is  either  eternal  or  omnipresent,  and  there  could  be  no 
assurance  of  it  ever  receiving  the  numerous  offerings  made 
by  diverse  votaries,  apart  from  the  difficulty  of  the  deity 
conferring  rewards.  There  must,  therefore,  be  a  capacity, 
which  does  not  exist  prior  to  the  sacrificial  action,  either  in 
the  principal  performance  or  in  the  agent,  but  which  is 
generated  in  the  course  of  the  performance.  Before  a  man 
performs  a  sacrifice,  which  will  lead  to  heaven,  there  is  an 
incapacity  in  the  offering  and  in  the  man  himself  to  secure 
that  result,  but,  when  he  has  performed  it,  he  becomes,  as 
a  result  of  the  action,  endowed  with  a  potency,  styled 
Apurva,  which  in  the  course  of  time  will  secure  for  him  the 
end  desired.  The  existence  of  this  potency  is  testified  to 
in  the  scriptures;  its  necessity  is  apparent  by  the  means  of 
proof  known  as  presumption.  We  find  in  the  Veda 
assertions  that  sacrifices  produce  certain  results,  and,  as  the 
operation  of  the  sacrifice,  as  we  see  it,  is  transient,  the 
truth  of  the  scripture  would  be  vitiated  if  we  did  not  accept 
the  theory  of  Apurva.  Nor  is  there  anything  illogical  in 
the  doctrine;  every  action  sets  in  force  activities  in 
substances  or  agents,  and  these  come  to  fruition  when  the 
necessary  auxiliaries  are  present.  The  action  specified  is 
called  into  existence  by  the  injunction  contained  in  the 
form  of  an  optative  in  a  sentence  in  the  Veda. 

From  this  doctrine  Prabhakara  dissents,  elaborating 
instead  a  theory  which  is  obviously  a  refinement  on  the 
simple  view  which  Kumarila  accepts  from  the  older  writers 
of  the  school  and  which  best  suits  the  Mimamsa  Sutra.2  In 
his  opinion  the  injunction  rests  in  the  sentence  as  a  whole, 

1  Manameyodaya,  p.  88. 

2  II,   1,   1    ff ;   Prakaranapancika,    pp.    J85   ff  ;    Tantravarttika, 
II,  1,  1-$. 


GOD,  THE  SOUL,  AND  MATTER  75 

not  in  the  optative  verb,  and  he  denies  that  from  the  action 
there  arises  directly  the  Apurva.  On  the  contrary,  the 
process  is  that  the  injunctive  sentence  lays  down  a  mandate, 
Niyoga;  this  excites  the  man  to  exertion,  and  this  exertion 
pertains  to  some  form  of  action,  indicated  by  the  verb  of 
the  injunctive  sentence.  The  exertion  produces  in  the  agent 
a  result  (kdrya)  to  which  also  the  name  of  Niyoga  is  given 
by  Prabhakara,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  this  which  acts  as 
an  incentive  to  the  agent  to  put  forth  exertion  towards  the 
performance  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb  of  the  in 
junctive  clause.  The  Niyoga,  however,  is  unable  to  produce 
its  result,  unless  aided  by  something  which  Salikanatha  styles 
fate,  nor  is  it  apparent  that  either  in  his  terminology  or 
in  his  view  of  the  process  Prabhakara's  doctrine  is  any 
superior  to  that  of  Kumarila.  It  seems  as  if  primarily  it  arose 
from  nothing  more  important  than  the  observation  that  the 
result  produced  in  the  agent  was  in  one  sense  his  motive  to 
action  as  much  as  the  sentence  directing  the  action  to  be  done, 
leading  to  a  transfer  of  the  term  Niyoga,  naturally  applicable 
to  the  sentence,  to  the  condition  in  the  agent  to  which  the 
more  orthodox  name  of  Apurva  was  usually  applied. 

In  simple  sacrifices  there  is  only  one  Apurva  produced,  but 
in  more  complicated  sacrifices  there  may  be  several,  as  a  rule 
four.  Thus  in  the  new  and  full  moon  sacrifices,  consisting 
of  two  sets  of  three  oblations  at  new  and  full  moon  respec 
tively,  there  may  be  distinguished  the  Angapurva,  pertaining 
to  the  minor  acts  of  the  several  oblations;  the  Utpattyapurva, 
the  result  flowing  from  each  of  the  three  oblations  in  either 
set;  the  Samudayapurva,  the  result  of  each  group  of  three; 
and  the  Phalapurva,  the  result  of  the  whole  performance  re 
garded  as  a  unit.  But  it  is  not  every  action  which  brings 
about  an  Apurva;  those  actions,  which  are  devoted  simply  to 
some  material  result,  though  a  part  of  the  sacrifice,  such  as 
the  appointment  of  priests  or  the  threshing  of  corn,  are  not 
credited  with  any  such  effect,  as  they  serve  an  immediate 
purpose  and  need  no  further  explanation. 

In  the  view  of  both  schools  there  is  a  clear  relation  be 
tween  the  injunction  and  the  action  of  the  agent;  the  former 
possesses  a  verbal  energy  (sdbdl  bhdvana}  in  its  tendency  to 
produce  action  by  the  agent,  while  the  latter  puts  forth 


76  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

actual  energy  (drthl  bhdvand}  towards  the  end  indicated  in 
the  injunction.1 

It  is  significant  of  the  theistic  tendency  of  Indian  thought 
that  even  the  Miraarhsa  was  not  exempt  from  transformation. 
Despite  its  emphatic  denial  of  the  existence  of  a  Supreme 
Lord,  the  Sarvasiddhdntasamgraha  (VIII,  40, 41)  treats  the 
end  of  man  as  to  be  obtained  by  meditation  upon,  and  wor 
ship  of,  the  Supreme_Spirit  which  is  manifested  in  each  man, 
and  authors,  such  as  Apade va  and  Laugaksi  Bhaskara,  declare 
that  if  the  sacrifice  is  performed  in  honour  of  Govinda  or 
the  creator,  Isvara,  it  leads  to  the  highest  good,  basing  this 
assertion  on  the  authority  of  the  Bhagavadgltd.  Hence  it  is 
easy  to  explain  the  tendency  of  such  works  as  the  Sesvara- 
rnimdmsd  of  the  polymath  Venkatesa,  where  Vedanta  tenets 
are  grafted  on  the  Mimamsa.  Gunaratna,  in  his  comment 
on  the  Saddarasanasamuccaya  (p.  298)  similarly  attributes  to 
Jaimini  acceptance  of  the  Maya  doctrine. 

The  question,  however,  arises,  how  far,  in  accepting  views 
of  the  future  of  the  spirit,  which  are  rejected  by  both 
Prabhakara  and  by  Kumarila,  and  in  imparting  a  theistic 
tinge  to  the  doctrine,  later  texts  relied  on  earlier  authority, 
now  lost  to  us.  It  must  be  remembered  that  in  the  Vedanta 
Siitra  there  are  attributed  to  Jamini  not  merely  views  in 
entire  harmony  with  his  principles,  such  as  insistence  (IV, 
1,  17)  on  the  fact  that  works  bear  their  due  fruit  without 
any  divine  intervention  of  any  kind,  but  also  opinions  which 
show  him  in  the  unexpected  light  of  a  true  Vedantin,  though 
not  of  the  orthodox  doctrine  of  Samkara.  Thus  he  is 
credited  with  the  view  that  the  order  in  which  a  man  must 
pass  through  the  various  stages  of  life  (dsramas)  is  fixed  as 
from  lower  to  higher,  and  never  vice  versa,  and  as  explain 
ing  away  as  metaphorical  the  assertion  that  the  highest 
spirit  is  a  span  in  size.  More  precise  light  is  thrown  on 
his  doctrine  by  the  fact  that  he  adopted  the  view  of  the  fate 
of  the  soul  on  departing,  by  which  it  is  ultimately  led  by  a 
spirit  to  Brahman,  in  the  sense  that  the  absolute  Brahman  is 
meant,  though  Samkara  argued,  apparently  against  the 

1  Mimamsanyayaprakasa  (ed.  Benares)  pp.  1-22,  118-35  ;  Ml- 
niamsaparibhasd,  pp.  25-30. 


77 

intention  of  the  Vedanta  Sutra  (IV,  3,  7-14)  that  the  refer 
ence  is  to  the  lower  Brahman,  the  soul  passing  to  the  higher 
state  only  on  the  occurrence  of  the  absorption  of  the  lower 
Brahman.  In  its  final  condition  the  soul  possesses,  accord 
ing  to  Jaimini,  all  the  qualities  of  the  Brahman  enumerated 
in  the  Chdndogya  Upanisad  (VIII,  7) ,  together  with  omnipo 
tence  and  omniscience,  and  further  possesses  a  body  and  senses, 
having  the  power  of  assuming  many  diverse  forms.  Though 
this  is  not  the  view  of  Sarhkara(IV,  4,  5,  11)  it  can  hardly 
be  imagined  that  Jaimini  really  regarded  this  condition  as 
pertaining  to  the  soul  merely  preparatory  to  final  absorption 
in  the  Brahman;  we  may  rather  suppose  that  on  this  topic 
his  views  were  akin  to  those  of  Ramanuja,  and  perhaps 
of  Badarayana  himself. 

If  we  were  to  hold  that  the  Jaimini  of  the  Karma- 
Mimamsa  and  the  Jaimini  of  the  Vedanta  must  be  regarded 
as  enunciating  one  body  of  doctrine,  we  would  be  forced  to 
the  admission  that  the  later  school  of  Mimamsa  departed 
from  the  principles  of  the  founder  of  the  doctrine  by  ignor 
ing  the  fact  that  the  Mimdmsd  Sutra  represented  only  one 
side  of  his  thought.  But  to  accept  this  would  probably  be 
to  lay  far  too  much  stress  on  the  traditional  allocation  of 
doctrines;  it  is  far  more  plausible  to  assume  that  the  views 
expressed  in  the  Mimamsa  do  not  represent  one  aspect  of  the 
thought  of  an  individual  sage,  but  are  the  expression  of  the 
doctrine  of  a  school,  which  appealed  to  Jaimini  and 
Badarayana  only  so  far  as  it  thought  fit  to  adopt  or  discuss 
views  of  theirs.  It  would  otherwise  be  altogether  too 
remarkable  that  of  two  authorities,  who  covered  much  the 
same  ground,  we  should  have  preserved  the  Sutra  of  one  on 
the  doctrine  of  action,  and  the  Sutra  of  the  other  on  the  nature 
of  the  absolute,  and  in  both  cases  the  form  of  the  Sutra  is 
decidedly  unfavourable  to  the  view  that  it  is  the  production 
of  one  definite  author.  The  shadowy  personalities  of  Jaimini 
and  Badarayana  can  hardly  claim  much  more  effective 
reality  than  those  of  Gautama  or  Kanada,  or  even  than 
Kapila  himself. 

If,  on  the  one  hand,  there  was  a  tendency  to  adapt  the 
Mimamsa  to  theistic  or  pantheistic  views,  there  was  on  the 
other  a  steady  process  of  degradation  of  the  deities  to  whom 


78  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

the  offerings  were  supposed  to  be  made.  It  can  hardly  be 
assumed  that  these  deities  were  not  believed  to  be  real  by 
the  founders  of  the  MImamsa.  And  there  is  nothing  to  show 
that  Jaimini  did  not  accept  their  existence.  But  the  later 
doctrine,  a_s  evinced  in  such  works  as  the  Devatdsvarupavi- 
cdra  of  Apadeva,  does  not  accept  the  validity  of  the 
descriptions  of  the  deities  given  in  the  Puranas  as  showing 
the  existence  of  such  beings  ;  these  passages  rank  as  mere 
Arthavada  ;  the  deity  is  merely  that  to  which  offering  is 
made,  and  has  no  existence  beyond  the  Mantras  addressed 
to  it. 


THE   RULES   OF   RITUAL 
INTERPRETATION 

WE  have  seen  that  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  establish 
by  their  elaborate  epistemological  and  metaphysical  en 
quiries  precisely  the  same  results  as  were  more  simply 
accepted  by  Jaimini,  the  fact  that  duty  or  righteousness  is 
inculcated  by  the  Veda  in  the  form  of  injunctions,  which  are 
to  be  carried  out  on  the  strength  of  the  authority  of  that  text 
as  uncreated  and  eternal.  The  task  of  Jaimini,  in  all  save 
the  first  Pada  of  Adhyaya  I,  is,  therefore,  to  lay  down  the 
principles  which  will  enable  men  rightly  to  perform  the 
actions  which  the  Veda  enjoins,  but  which  the  vast  extent  of 
the  Vedic  literature  renders  it  difficult  to  determine.  The 
task  falls  essentially  under  two  great  heads;  it  is  necessary 
to  determine  precisely  to  what  texts  and  in  what  degree 
authority  attaches,  and  it  is  requisite  to  classify  systemati 
cally  the  various  forms  of  injunction  with  reference  to  the 
actions  which  they  enjoin.  Both  duties  are  performed, 
though  occasionally  in  somewhat  haphazard  manner,  in  the 
Sutra;  the  more  important  one,  the  investigation  of  injunc 
tion,  forms  the  main  topic  of  many  later  works,  while  the 
compendia  usually  cover  more  or  less  adequately  the  whole 
field.  The  details  of  the  discussions  have  necessarily  little 
general  value;  they  deal  with  incidents  of  sacrifices,  which 
flourished  only  in  the  early  days  of  the  history  of  the 
Mlmarhsa,  and  in  many  cases  the  labour  devoted  to  their 
investigation  cannot  but  seem  to  us  mis-spent.  On  the  other 
hand,  the  principles  of  interpretation  developed  are  often 
both  valuable  and  interesting  as  examples  of  logical  analysis. 

Of  the  Vedic  texts  the  Brahmanas  afford  the  immediate 
material  for  the  extraction  of  the  injunctions  which  are  the 


80  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

essential  part  of  the  Veda,  but  they  contain  also  passages 
which  cannot  be  treated  as  dealing  with  either  positive  or 
negative  injunctions,  and  are  classed  either  as  explanatory 
matter,  Arthavada,  or  name,  Namadheya.  The  Arthavada 
(I,  2, 1-30)  at  first  sight  seems  not  to  be  entitled  to  authority, 
but  Kumarila  and  Prabhakara  alike  defend  its  validity,  the 
latter  against  the  charge  that  such  sentences  are  inexpressive, 
since  they  are  not  construed  with  injunctive  verbal  forms. 
The  value  of  the  Arthavada,  both  hold,  lies  in  it  either 
extolling  desirable,  or  censuring  forbidden,  acts;  it  thus 
comes  into  immediate  connection  with  injunction  or  prohi 
bition.  Hence  it  follows  that,  in  cases  where  it  might  be 
possible  to  extract  from  an  Arthavada  an  injunction,  it  is 
needless  to  do  so,  the  passage  being  adequately  explained  if 
it  remains  eulogistic  of  some  action  already  enjoined. 
Arthavadas  may  be  variously  divided,  but  the  simplest 
division  is  into  three  classes :  the  first  is  where  in  contradic 
tion  of  some  other  means  of  proof  a  quality  is  asserted  to  exist, 
as  in  "  The  post  is  the  sun,"  which  serves  to  extol  the 
brilliance  of  the  post.  Or  it  may  merely  reiterate  a  truth 
known  otherwise,  as  in  "  Agni  is  a  protection  from  the  cold." 
Or  it  merely  may  refer  to  something  which  has  happened, 
neither  contradicted  by  other  means  of  proof  nor  already 
known. 

The  case  of  name  (I,  4,  1-16)  is  far  more  obscure;  dis 
cussions  regarding  it  usually  turn  on  one  or  other  of  the 
sentences  udbhidd  yajeta  pasukdmah,  "  he  who  desires 
cattle  should  sacrifice  with  the  udbhid "  ;  citrayd  yajeta 
pastikdmah,  "with  the  citrd  ";  agnihotram  juholi,  "he  offers 
the  Agnihotra";  and  syenendbhicaran  yajeta,  "he  who 
practices  witchcraft  should  offer  the  syena  sacrifice."  It 
seems  at  least  plausible  to  suppose  that  the  subdivision 
owes  its  creation  to  the  practical  necessity  of  dealing  with  a 
limited  number  of  obscure  sacrificial  terms,  but  was  later 
extended  into  a  wider  area.  In  the  developed  theory,1  the 
justification  of  the  classification  of  name  is  given  as  follows. 
Each  word  in  the  injunction  must  be  brought  into  effective 

Thibaut,  Arthasathgraha,  pp.  xii,  xiii  ;  MimamsanyayaprakaSa, 
pp.  85  ff. 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION      81 

relation  to  the  energy  in  the  agent  excited  by  the  injunction. 
The  energy  requires  a  result  to  be  achieved,  an  instrument 
wherewith  to  achieve  it,  and  an  indication  of  the  procedure 
to  be  followed.  The  last  requisite  is  furnished  by  various 
subsidiary  injunctions,  the  instrument  and  the  object  are 
given  by  the  verb  yajeta  and  the  qualification  pasukdmah, 
which  may  be  reduced  to  ydgena  pasum  bhdvayet,  "  he 
should  effect  or  realise  cattle  by  the  use  of  the  sacrifice." 
It  remains  to  dispose  of  ndbhidd,  and,  various  other  sugges 
tions  as  to  how  it  should  be  taken  (e.g.  as  denoting  a  spade) 
being  rejected,  the  conclusion  is  arrived  at  that  it  merely 
serves  to  limit  the  idea  expressed  by  ydgena,  is  only  a  name, 
and  thus  deserves  a  separate  place  in  the  classification  of 
texts. 

Distinct  from  the  Brahmana  is  the  Mantra  (I,  2,  31-53) 
of  which  no  effective  definition  is  attempted  in  the  texts.1 
The  Mantras  are  divided  into  the  Re,  Saman  and  Yajus, 
according  as  they  are  recited,  sung,  or  muttered,  usually  in  a 
low  tone,  though  some  of  the  Yajus  Mantras,  the  Nigadas, 
are  said  out  aloud;  the  Yajus  is  usually  held  to  be  unmet- 
rical,  though  with  small  accuracy.  Mantras  do  not  lay  down 
injunctions,  but  in  the  main  they  serve  to  denote  something 
of  value  in  connection  with  injunctions,  especially  the  deity 
to  whom  offering  is  to  be  made.  The  tendency  to  find  this 
characteristic  is  much  overdone  in  the  MImamsa,  though 
even  it  is  compelled  to  recognise  now  and  then  that  a 
Mantra  must  be  regarded  as  merely  of  a  eulogistic  character, 
or  even  that  it  is  destined  to  have  some  supernatural  fruit. 
The  MImariisa  position  is,  of  course,  an  inevitable  result  of 
eliminating  the  goodwill  of  the  deity  as  a  real  factor  in  the 
sacrifice  ;  the  hymns  with  which  their  authors  intended  to 
confer  pleasure  on  the  gods  become  a  somewhat  cumbrous, 
and  not  altogether  useful,  part  of  the  sacrificial  apparatus. 

Apropos  of  the  Mantras  of  the  Yajus  type,  however,  the 
MImamsa  develops  some  sensible  rules  of  construction 
(II,  1,46-49),  rendered  necessary  by  the  fact  that,  while  the 
metre  in  the  case  of  the  Re  and  the  song  in  the  case  of  the 
Saman  determined  the  extent  of  the  Mantra,  the  Yajus 

1  Mlmathsabalapr akdsa ,  pp.  58-70;  Mtmdmsdparibhdsa,  p.  40. 

6 


82  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

Mantras  were  recorded  in  long  paragraphs,  with  no  obvious 
mechanical  dividing  marks.  These  principles  are  that  of 
syntactical  unity  (ekavdkyatd) ;  those  words  must  be  taken 
together  which,  when  so  united,  form  a  single  idea,  or,  as 
Prabhakara  puts  it,  to  suit  his  theory  of  injunction,  express 
a  single  purpose,  and  which,  taken  apart,  are  not  expressive 
of  any  idea  or  purpose.  Secondly,  there  is  admitted  the 
principle  of  syntactical  split  (vakyabheda) ,  which  permits 
us  to  break  up  what  else  might  be  taken  as  a  single  sentence 
into  parts,  each  of  which  must  contain  a  single  idea.  But 
this  expedient  is  permissible  only  when  there  is  a  clear 
Vedic  injunction  to  make  the  split,  or  when  no  other  con 
struction  is  really  possible,  for  otherwise  the  error  is  com 
mitted  of  multiplying  Apurvas  resulting  from  Mantras. 
None  the  less  it  is  a  necessary  procedure  in  cases  where  it  is 
made  clear  in  any  way  that  there  are  distinct  acts  to  be 
accompanied  by  Mantras;  "Pleasant  I  make  this  seat 
for  thee  ;  sit  upon  it "  (T.B.  Ill,  7,  5,  2)  would  primd  facie 
be  one  Mantra,  but,  as  it  is  intended  to  serve  the  double 
purpose  of  accompanying  the  act  of  making  the  seat  for  the 
cake,  and  setting  it  down,  it  must  be  taken  as  two.  Thirdly, 
there  is  the  principle  of  extension  (anusanga),  which 
denotes  that  it  is  often  necessary  in  the  case  of  Mantras  to 
supply  with  several  sets  of  words  a  clause  which  follows  the 
last  of  these  sets  only,  and  which  might  thus  be  deemed  to 
belong  to  it  alone. 

Authority,  however,  is  not  confined  to  the  Vedic  Sarhhitas 
and  the  Brahmanas.  It  is  extended  to  the  Smrtis,  in  which 
term  Kumarila1  includes  primarily  the  Itihasas,  Puranas, 
and  the  Smrti  of  Manu,  these  being  works  which  claim 
universal  application.  The  Itihasas  and  Puranas  he  deems 
to  contain  injunctions  based  on  Vedic  authority  and  much 
Arthavada,  but  he  admits  that  there  are  also  injunctions 
arising  from  mere  worldly  considerations,  passages  useful 
only  to  give  pleasure,  and  other  extraneous  matter  ;  the 
hymns  to  deities  serve  to  secure  a  transcendental  result. 
They  serve  as  wholes  the  useful  purpose  of  instructing  men 

1  Tantravarttika,  trans,  pp.  25.  112  ff,  244.  The  Sutra  (I,  3,  1-7, 
11-14)  never  mentions  the  word  Smrti  and  the  commentators  differ 
widely  in  their  versions. 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION      83 

of  very  various  capacity  and  knowledge.  In  the  case  of  the 
Smrtis  proper  only  five  alternatives  are  available:  either  they 
are  completely  erroneous,  which  is  impossible,  as  these  works 
are  obviously  useful  and  men  are  not  so  foolish  as  to  believe 
nonsense  ;  or  they  are  due  to  personal  observation,  which 
cannot  be  accepted;  or  they  rest  on  tradition,  which  would 
give  no  assurance  of  validity;  or  they  are  deliberately 
intended  to  deceive,  which  is  incredible  for  lack  of  motive 
and  probability  of  success;  or,  finally,  they  represent  lost 
Vedic  tradition.  For  this  decision  there  can  be  adduced  a 
certain  corroboration  in  the  fact  that  for  certain  statements 
in  Smrtis  we  can  find  confirmation  in  Vedic  texts,  whence  we 
can  assume  that  other  statements  were  also  derived  from  texts, 
now  unhappily  lost  to  us.  Thus  part  of  the  Smrtis  is  derived 
from  the  Veda,  part  from  ordinary  motives  of  life,  and  the 
story  material  is  Arthavada,  as  in  the  Itihasas  and  Puranas. 
The  view  of  Prabhakara1  is  not  essentially  different;  he 
also  accepts  the  inference  of  Vedic  authority,  but  expressly 
negates  it  in  the  case  of  Smrtis  which  do  not  prescribe 
or  prohibit  any  course  of  action,  for  example,  statements 
that  plants  have  souls,  which  contradicts  his  own  denial  of 
vegetable  bodies.  Both  schools  again  agree  (I,  3,  15,  16) 
in  accepting  as  valid  the  Smrtis  of  such  ^authors  as 
Gautama,  Vasistha,  Baudhayana,  Apastamba,  Sankha  and 
Harita,  despite  the  occurrence  in  them  of  passages  laying 
down  certain  customs  as  practised  by  persons  in  the  east, 
and  so  on,  a  fact  which  apparently  contradicts  the  universa 
lity  of  the  Vedic  injunction.  The  decision  of  the  schools  is 
that  their  injunctions  are  truly  universal,  and  even  the  Veda 
lays  down  certain  practices  as  to  be  performed  by  certain 
classes  only,  for  instance,  the  Rajasuya  is  a  sacrifice  for 
kings  only. 

The  Vedangas,  or  subsidiary  treatises  bearing  on  Vedic 
pronounciation,  ritual,  grammar,  etymology  and  astronomy, 
are  also  admitted  to  rest  in  part  on  Vedic  tradition,  and  the 
Mimamsa  and  philosophic  treatises  generally  are  permitted 
to  share  in  Vedic  authority ;  thus  Kumarila2  assures  us  that 

1  Prakaranapancika,  pp.  100,  101,  150, 
''  Slokav&rttika,  p.  267  (v.  201). 


84  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

the  Buddhist  denial  of  the  external  world  was  not  really 
meant  to  be  taken  as  a  serious  contradiction  of  its  reality, 
but  to  divert  men's  minds  from  undue  attention  to  it,  and 
so  with  other  apparently  erroneous  tenets.  In  the  case  of  the 
ritual  Sutras  the  claim  is  made  by  some  that  they  must  be 
treated  as  true  Veda  themselves,  but  this  is  denied,  for  they 
have  human  authors,  and  are  merely,  like  Smrtis,  based  on 
Vedic  authority.  In  the  case  of  grammar,  however,  a  really 
interesting  discussion  is  raised  on  the  Sutra  (I,  3,  4-30)  by 
those  who  deny  that  it  can  be  made  out  to  rest  on  Vedic 
authority,  and  who  go  so  far  as  to  challenge  the  validity  of 
the  claims  of  the  grammarians  to  be  authoritative. 

The  argument  of  these  unorthodox  persons  runs :  words 
like  gavi,  in  lieu  of  the  grammarians'  gauh,  for  cow  are 
perfectly  correct;  they  are  fully  expressive,  they  are  percept 
ible  by  the  ear,  they  are  as  eternal  as  any  word  is,  and  no 
beginning  in  time  for  them  can  be  traced.  The  science  of 
grammar,  too,  has  no  Vedic  connection;  it  differs  in  no  way 
from  the  process  of  explaining  vernacular  words  for  everyday 
use;  it  does  not  deal  with  actions  which  are  the  sole  business 
of  the  Veda;  it  serves  no  useful  purposes  in  relation  to  duty,  as 
we  do  not  need  grammar  to  tell  us  the  meanings  of  words; 
nor  is  grammar  the  source  of  usage,  since,  on  the  contrary, 
it  rests  upon  and  follows  usage.  The  reply  of  the  Mimarhsa 
is  not  convincing;  it  maintains  that  synonyms  are  not 
permissible,  unless  enjoined  by  Vedic  use;  as  gauh 
expresses  exactly  the  meaning  "  cow,"  any  variant  of  it  is 
wrong  and  undesirable,  and  has  such  power  of  denotation  as 
it  may  actually  possess,  merely  because  of  its  similarity  to 
gauh  and  not  in  its  own  right.  The  science  of  grammar  also 
is  essential  to  set  out  in  orderly  derivation  the  vast  masses 
of  words  in  the  Vedas;  moreover,  not  usage  alone,  but  usage 
and  grammar  determine  whether  a  word  has  the  correct  form 
to  convey  the  meaning,  and  grammar  in  the  last  issue  is 
more  authoritative  than  mere  usage.  That  correct  words 
produce,  when  used,  a  transcendental  result  is  proved  by  the 
fact  that  the  Veda  enjoins  their  use,  and  forbids  the  use  of 
barbarous  expressions;  moreover,  truth  leads  to  supreme 
bliss,  and  the  use  of  correct  words  is  truth  in  speech. 
Fortunately  this  disquisition  does  not  prevent  either  Prabha- 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION      85 

kara  or  Kumarila  (I,  3,  10)  from  agreeing  that,  when  the 
Veda  uses  a  barbarous  word,  it  is  to  be  interpreted  in  the 
sense  barbarian  usage  accords  to  it,  in  lieu  of  attempting  to 
foist  upon  it  an  etymological  sense.1 

The  relation  of  Smrti  authority  to  the  Veda,  in  cases 
where  there  appears  to  be  conflict,  is  the  subject  of 
divergence  of  opinion  between  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila. 
In  the  view  of  the  former,  which  is  apparently  that  of 
iheMimdmsd  Sutra  (I,  3,3-4),  if  a  Smrti  contradicts  a  Vedic 
passage,  the  former  loses  all  authority,  while,  even  in  the 
case  of  Smrti  passages  which  do  not  thus  offend,  it  may  be 
impossible  to  accord  their  injunctions  any  spiritual  value, 
if  they  seem  to  be  due  to  the  avarice  of  the  priests,  as 
when  the  giving  of  the  cloth  from  the  sacrificial  post  to  a 
priest  is  enjoined  by  Smrti  authority.  Kumarila,  however, 
with  his  greater  regard  for  tradition,  reduces,  as  far  as 
possible,  cases  of  contradiction  to  mere  instances  where 
alternatives  are  permissible,  and  only  holds  that  the  Sutra 
recommends  in  the  case  of  such  alternatives  the  adoption  of 
that  which  has  direct,  and  not  merely  inferred/Vedic  authority. 

Below  the  Smrtis  in  value  comes  the  practice  of  good 
men  (I,  3,  8-9)  or  custom  (I,  3,  15-23)  on  the  simple 
ground  that,  while  both  must  go  back  to  Vedic  authority  to 
be  valid,  the  former  goes  more  directly  to  the  fountainhead. 
In  addition,  however,  to  Smrti  and  practise  must  be  reckon 
ed  as  sources  of  knowledge  of  duty  the  implications  contained 
in  Vedic  texts,  which  may  be  deduced  by  us  from  them,  even 
if  not  already  set  out  in  Smrtis  or  by  tradition. 

The  essential  function  of  all  these  sources  is  to  give  us 
knowledge  of  injunctions  (vidhi),  and  injunctions  are  encite- 
ments  to  actions.  Actions  may  be  classified  in  various  ways; 
there  is  a  clear  distinction  between  Vedic  and  worldly  actions, 
with  the  former  alone  is  the  Mimamsa  concerned.  Actions 
of  this  type  may  be  classed  as  positive,  as  negative  (pratise- 
dha),  or  as  partaking  of  both  characters  (paryuddsa),  as  in 

1  Kumarila  enlivens  the  discussion  by  giving  a  long  list  of  errors  in 
grammar  committed  even  by  grammarians,  and  similarly  diversifies 
(I,  3,  7)  his  exposition  of  the  practice  of  the  good  by  an  account  of 
crimes  attributed  to  gods  and  sages.  On  grammar,  cf.  Nyayamanjari, 
pp.  412-26. 


86  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

the  case  of  a  vow  not  to  look  at  the  sun  taken  by  a  student. 
Of  actions1  the  sacrificial  are  the  most  important,  falling 
under  the  three  main  classes  of  Yaga,  the  offering  to  a  deity 
of  a  substance;  Homa,  the  offering  of  a  substance  in  fire  or 
water;  and  Dana,  the  waiver  of  one's  ownership  of  an  object 
in  favour  of  a  third  party.  Sacrifices,  again,  can  be  divided 
according  as  they  serve  as  archetypes  only,  like  the  Agni- 
hotra,  or  as  derivatives  (vikrti),  like  the  Masagnihotra,  or 
as  both,  like  the  victim  for  Agni  and  Soma,  based  on  the  new 
and  full  moon  sacrifice  and  itself  a  model  for  the  offering 
at  the  Soma  pressing;  or  as  neither,  like  the  Darvihoma,  for 
special  reasons  given  in  the  Sutra.  More  important  is  the 
division  by  purpose;  the  Nitya  sacrifices  must  constantly  be 
performed  at  the  due  seasons ;  the  Naimittika  must  be  per 
formed  on  certain  special  occasions,  as  the  Jyotis  offering 
on  the  approach  of  spring,  while  the  Kamya  offerings  are 
optional,  being  undertaken  by  a  man  who  desires  some 
special  end,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Karlristi  performed  to 
obtain  rain. 

The  direction  to  perform  an  offering  is  laid  down  in  an 
originating  injunction  (utpattividhi)  or  an  injunction  of 
application  (viniyogavidhi),  according  as  the  matter  concerned 
is  a  principal  or  a  subordinate  offering.  In  either  case,  it 
is  frequently  necessary  to  ascertain  precisely  how  many 
actions  are  prescribed,  and  six  rules  for  this  purpose  are 
laid  down  by  the  Mlmarhsa  (II,  2  and  3).  Difference  in 
words  is  one  clear  indication,  especially  in  the  case  of  the 
verb,  which  is  the  most  important  part  of  a  sentence  of  in 
junction;  the  repetition  of  the  verb  indicates  distinct  offer 
ings;  the  mention  of  a  definite  number  of  oblations  is  clear 
evidence;  other  sources  are  the  difference  of  names,  of 
materials  to  be  used,  and  of  context.  In  the  case  of  the  last 
item  it  is  agreed  that  the  occurrence  of  the  same  offering  in 
two  different  recensions  of  one  text,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
Kanva  and  Madhyarhdina  texts  of  the  Satapatha  Brdhmana, 
does  not  constitute  a  diversity  of  context. 

The  originating  injunctions  are  few  in  number,  relating 
as  they  do  to  the  principal  Vedic  offerings  only,  such  as  the 

1  MimamstibalaprakaSa,  pp.  81  ff ;  Mitnaiiisdparibhasa,  pp.  17  ft. 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION     87 

Agnihotra,  the  new  and  full  moon  sacrifices,  the  Soma 
sacrifice,  and  so  forth.  It  might  have  been  expected  that 
there  would  have  been  made  some  effort  to  systematise  these 
offerings,  but  no  trace  of  any  attempt  to  effect  this  end  is 
seen  in  the  MImamsa,  which  accepts  the  sacrifices  from  the 
sacrificial  tradition.  It  is  true  that  there  is  a  certain  degree 
of  order  of  progress  from  the  simpler  to  the  more  complex, 
but  this  order  is  not  absolute,  being  broken  by  the  necessity 
of  performing  the  Naimittika  offerings  on  the  occurrence  of 
the  special  occasions  which  evoke  them.  Nor  is  there  any 
principle  discernible  in  the  rewards  attainable  by  these 
offerings  ;  they  include  such  material  things  as  wealth, 
usually  in  cattle,  children,  long  life,  rule,  and,  most  frequently 
of  all,  heaven,  which  is  held,  on  what  is  known  as  the 
Visvajit  principle  (IV,  3,  10-16),  to  be  the  reward  promised 
in  any  case  in  which  no  specific  boon  is  laid  down. 

The  originating  injunctions,  however,  do  no  more  than 
excite  in  the  mind  of  the  hearer  the  desire  to  perform  the 
action  which  they  enjoin,  generally  in  the  form  of  a 
sacrifice  ;  it  remains  for  other  injunctions,  those  of  appli 
cation,  to  denote  the  exact  manner  of  procedure  (itikar- 
tavyata),  by  specifying  the  numerous  subsidiary  actions 
requisite,  and  the  materials  and  other  necessaries  for  the 
performance.  The  discrimination  between  what  is  principal 
and  what  is  subsidiary  (sesa)  occupies  the  greater  part  of 
the  attention  of  the  MImamsa,  and  it  stands  in  a  close 
relation  to  the  motive  for  the  performance  of  the  various 
actions.  Actions  may  be  undertaken  according  to  the  Sutra 
(IV,  1,  Iff),  followed  by  Sabarasvamin,  Prabhakara,  and 
Kumarila,  either  for  the  sake  of  the  agent  (purusartha) ,  or 
for  the  sake  of  the  offering  (kratvartha) ,  while  Partha- 
sarathi  adds  a  third  class  of  those  which  are  neither  for 
the  one  purpose  or  the  other,  giving  as  an  instance"  the 
Agnyadhana,  or  piling  of  the  sacred  fire.  This  innovation 
seems  to  be  without  warrant  ;  the  original  distinction  corres 
ponds  roughly  to  that  between  principal  and  subordinate 
actions  ;  the  new  and  full  moon  offerings  serve  to  benefit 
man  by  producing  a  due  reward,  while  the  fore-offerings, 
which  form  part  of  them,  are  merely  subsidiary  to  the 
sacrifice  ;  materials  normally  are  subsidiary  to  the  sacrifice, 


88  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

any  good  results  mentioned  being  treated  as  merely  Artha- 
vada,  though  on  occasions  a  thing  like  curds,  which  serves  as 
an  element  in  offerings,  may  be  used  to  make  efficient  the 
sense  organs  of  the  sacrificer,  and  thus  to  serve  for  his 
benefit.  The  last  instance  shows  that  the  correspondence 
between  actions  for  the  benefit  of  the  agent  and  principal 
actions  is  by  no  means  complete. 

The  question  of  what  things  can  be  subsidiary  is  the 
subject  of  an  elaborate  investigation;  according  to  Badari's 
opinion,  cited  in  the  Mlmdmsd  Sutra  (III,  1,3),  the  only 
subsidiaries  are  substances,  accessories,  namely,  the  Mantras 
and  the  deities,  and  purificatory  actions,  such  as  the  thresh 
ing  of  corn.  To  this  list  Jaimini  adds  actions  or  sacrifices 
generally,  results,  and  agents.  The  distinction  between  the 
two  sets,  according  to  the  Vrttikara,  whom  Sabarasvamin 
cites,  is  that  the  first  three  classes  are  essentially  in  their 
nature  subsidiary,  while  the  latter  three  are  in  one  sense 
principal,  in  another  subsidiary.  Thus  the  sacrifices  are 
principal  with  reference  to  the  materials,  but  subsidiary  to 
the  result;  the  result  is  principal  with  reference  to  the 
sacrifice,  but  subsidiary  towards  the  agent;  the  agent,  again, 
is  principal  with  regard  to  the  result,  but  subsidiary  to  such 
acts  as  the  measuring  of  the  sacrificial  post,  which  is  to  be 
related  to  his  height.  From  another  point  of  view  the  agent 
may  be  said  to  be  subsidiary  to  the  sacrifices,  since  it  is  to 
perform  them  that  he  acts. 

Prabhakara1  divides  the  subsidiaries  into  four  classes, 
according  to  the  heads  of  class  (jati),  quality,  substance, 
and  actions,  denoted  by  verbs  (bhdvdrthdtmaka) .  The  last 
head  he  divides  into  those  actions  which  are  directly  con 
ducive  to  the  fulfilment  of  the  sacrifice  (samnipatyopakd- 
raka),  and  those  which  are  more  distantly  conducive  to  this 
result  (arddupakdraka).  The  former  he  classifies  in  four 
divisions;  the  bringing  into  existence  (utpatti)  of  some 
object,  as  the  production  of  dough  by  kneading  the  corn; 
the  obtaining  (prdpti)  of.  a  substance  already  in  existence, 
such  as  milk;  the  modification  (vikrti)  of  a  substance,  as  of 

1  Prakaranapancikd,    pp.   202   ff;   cf.    MimdmsanyayaprakaSa,  pp. 
62-67,  where  the  division  is  twofold,  siddha  and  kriya. 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION     89 

ghee  by  boiling;  and  the  purification  (samskrti)  of  substance, 
such  as  the  sprinkling  of  water  over  corn.  These  actions 
are  all  subservient  to  the  sacrifice,  and  to  the  Apurva,  which 
is  produced  by  the  sacrifice;  they  have  no  distinct  Apurvas 
of  their  own.  On  the  other  hand,  the  indirect  auxiliaries  have 
Apurvas  of  their  own,  though  some,  as  for  instance  the  drink 
ing  of  milk  by  the  sacrificer  at  the  Jyotistoma,  have  also  a  seen 
result.  In  the  case,  however,  of  such  a  sentence  as,  "He 
offers  to  Tanunapat,"  no  effect  on  the  substance  offered  or 
the  human  agent  is  obvious,  and  we  are  bound  to  assume  an 
Apurva  appertaining  to  the  action  by  itself,  which  is  sub 
sidiary  and  auxiliary  to  the  Apurva  of  the  sacrifice  as  a  whole. 
But  Kumarila,  who  contents  himself  with  a  simpler  division 
of  all  subsidiaries  into  the  two  classes  of  direct  and  indirect,1 
goes  much  further  in  seeking  to  recognise  subsidiary  Apur 
vas.  He  postulates  an  Apurva  for  every  injunction,  instead 
of  merely  for  injunctions  of  principal  actions  and  such 
others  as  cannot  be  disposed  of  by  any  other  means,  and 
thus,  while  he  does  not  assert  that  there  is  in  the  directly 
auxiliary  acts  themselves  an  Apurva,  he  holds  that  there  is 
an  Apurva  in  the  fact  that  a  choice  has  been  made  of  the 
particular  mode  of  action,  e.g.  in  selecting  the  mode  of 
thumping  as  the  proper  manner  of  cleansing  the  grain. 

In  dealing  with  injunctions  of  application  there  are  six 
means  by  which  the  relations  of  subordination  of  actions, 
etc.,  may  be  determined  (III,  2  and  3).  The  first  and 
most  important  indication  is  express  declaration;  thus,  if 
the  injunction  is  given  to  use  in  honour  of  the  Garhapatya 
fire  a  Mantra  to  Indra,  this  declaration  (sruti)  prevails 
over  the  normal  conclusion  that  a  verse  to  Indra  must 
come  in  a  ceremony  in  his  honour.  Second  in  importance 
is  indirect  implication  (linga);  thus  it  is  a  rule  in  the 
Soma  sacrifice  that  the  juice  used  is  to  be  consumed;  when, 
therefore,  a  Mantra  (T.S.  Ill,  2,  5,  1)  is  found  which  seems 
merely  to  refer  to  the  drinking,  it  must  be  assumed  that  it 
covers  by  its  reference  to  drinking  all  the  operations 
connected  with  that  action,  such  as  the  taking  up  of  the 
potion,  examining  it,  drinking  it,  and  digesting  it.  Thirdly, 

1  Sdstradipikd,  pp.  202,  203  ;  Mimdmsdparibhdsd,  pp.  16  ff. 


90  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

syntactical  connection  is  of  value;  thus,  in  one  passage 
(£.B.  IV,  4,  6,  16-18)  we  are  able  to  decide  that  Re  and 
Yajus  mean  the  Rgveda  and  the  Yajurveda,  and  not,  as 
might  else  be  thought,  metrical  and  prose  Mantras,  because 
of  the  syntactical  connection  with  the  immediately  preced 
ing  words.  Fourthly,  context  (prakarana)  is  of  great 
importance;  we  have  the  general  injunction  that  one  should 
perform  the  new  and  full  moon  sacrifices,  and  the  injunction 
to  offer  to  Tanunapat;  this  principle  enables  us  to  find  a 
purpose  for  the  latter  offering  in  connection  with  the  former 
sacrifices;  mere  syntactical  connection  would  not  here  help, 
as  the  sentences  stand  apart  and  are  in  themselves  quite 
complete.  Fifthly,  order  (krama)  or  position  (sthana)  is 
of  service;  thus  in  one  passage  (T.S.  I,  6,  2,  4)  occur  three 
Mantras  without  indication  of  use;  we  can,  however,  by 
finding  that  elsewhere  three  offerings  are  enjoined  in 
connection  with  these  Mantras,  assume  that  the  order  of  the 
sacrifices  and  the  Mantras  is  to  correspond,  one  being  used 
with  each  offering  in  order.  Finally,  names  (samdkhyd) 
may  supply  information  else  wanting;  thus  Mantras,  not 
otherwise  identified,  by  being  styled  Hautra  are  known  to 
fall  within  the  sphere  of  the  Hotr  priest.  Each  of  these 
means  for  adequate  reasons  is  deemed  to  be  of  more  value 
than  the  preceding,  and  in  working  out  the  principle  in 
detail  the  Mimarhsa  shows  both  skill  and  acumen,  even 
when  we  admit  that  in  many  cases  its  reasonings  were 
guided  by  the  fact  that  a  certain  usage  had  become  regular, 
and  therefore  that  the  sound  conclusion  was  already  given 
by  customary  practice. 

While  these  injunctions  of  application  determine  the 
exact  mode  in  which  the  ceremonies  prescribed  in  the  origi 
nating  injunctions  are  to  be  performed,  the  order  of  the 
actions  is  prescribed  by  injunctions  of  performance  (viniyoga- 
vidhi).  On  this  point,  however,  there  is  a  difference  of  view 
between  Prabhakara  and  Kumarila  (V,  1) ;  the  latter 
admits  readily  the  existence  of  injunctions  determining  the 
order  of  performance  by  the  process  of  extracting  such 
directions  from  injunctions  of  application.  Prabhakara, 
however,  insists  that  an  injunction  of  application  cannot  be 
deemed  to  deal  with  order,  which  is  a  matter  of  indifference, 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION     91 

so  long  as  an  act  is  performed,  but  even  he  admits  that  a 
few  cases  occur  in  which  the  order  of  offerings  is  specially 
defined.  As  a  rule,  however,  the  order  is  left  to  be  deter 
mined  by  minor  indications.  Thus  it  may  be  directly 
enjoined,  or  the  order  of  the  mention  of  the  offerings  may 
be  decisive,  or  the  order  of  the  natural  actions  may  be 
resorted  to;  thus  the  gruel  must  be  cooked  before  the  Agni- 
hotra  is  offered,  although  the  text  mentions  the  latter  first. 
Again,  the  order  of  commencement  is  of  importance;  in  the 
Vajapeya  there  are  seventeen  victims  to  be  immolated;  the 
offerer  may  begin  with  any  one,  but  the  different  acts  must 
l)e  done  to  each  following  the  initial  order  adopted.  Posi 
tion,  again,  is  of  importance;  thus  in  the  Agnistoma  there  are 
three  animal  victims,  one  to  Agni  and  Soma  offered  on  the 
day  before  the  sacrifice,  the  Savanlya  on  the  day  of  the 
pressing  of  the  Soma,  and  a  barren  cow  on  the  final  day. 
In  the  Sadyaskra,  a  modification  of  the  Agnistoma,  the 
three  victims  are  to  be  offered  on  one  day,  that  of  the  press 
ing;  hence,  as  this  is  properly  the  day  of  the  Savanlya 
victim,  it  is  to  be  offered  first,  followed  by  that  for  Agni  and 
Soma,  and  the  barren  cow.  Lastly,  the  order  of  the 
principal  actions  prevails  over  that  of  subordinate  actions; 
thus  at  the  new  moon  sacrifice  the  preliminaries  for  the 
offering  to  Indra  are  performed  before  those  of  the  offering 
to  Agni,  but  the  offering  to  Agni  comes  before  that  to  Indra : 
accordingly,  in  the  performance  of  subsequent  rites,  it  is 
those  connected  with  Agni  that  take  precedence  over  those 
connected  with  Indra.  In  cases  where  none  of  these  means 
give  a  clear  result,  any  order  may  be  resorted  to,  and  so  with 
offerings  performed  independently  to  obtain  worldly  goods. 
Nor  is  there  any  fixed  order  between  the  Soma  sacrifices  and 
the  simpler  rites  known  as  Istis. 

There  remains  the  question  of  the  right  to  perform 
sacrifices,  which  forms  the  subject  of  a  set  of  injunctions 
relating  to  qualification  (adhikaravidhi).  Jaimini,  it 
seems,  took  a  generous  view  of  the  position  of  woman,  con 
templating  (VI,  1,  6-8)  her  as  a  performer  of  sacrifices, 
though,  in  the  case  of  her  being  married,  both  she  and  her 
husband  must  co-operate  in  offering,  and  the  Vedic  Mantras 
would  be  recited  by  him  only.  Sabarasvamin  already 


92  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

emphasises  the  disability  of  women  arising  from  their 
ignorance  of  the  Veda,  which  is  not  asserted  by  Jaimini, 
who  doubtless  reflects  the  older  usage.  Sudras  are  excluded 
(VI,  1,  26,33)  from  sacrificing  for  this  very  reason  of  ignor 
ance  of  the  Veda,  and  in  the  later  texts  the  admission  of 
women  even  to  a  qualified  share  of  the  sacrifice  is  thus 
anomalous.  Some  small  amount  of  means  is  also  requisite 
in  a  sacrificer,  and  he  must  not  be  incapacitated  by  disease. 
Further  details  are  given  in  the  Srauta  Sutras,  which  recog 
nise,  like  Jaimini,  the  case  of  certain  classes  who  can  take 
some  part  in  sacrifice  though  not  of  the  three  higher  classes, 
such  as  the  Rathakara.  In  the  case  of  Sattras  only 
Brahmans  of  the  Visvamitra  family  studying  the  same  Kalpa 
Sutra  are  qualified  to  act;  all  act  as  sacrificers,  and  each 
individually  obtains  the  whole  benefit  of  the  sacrifice,  instead 
of  it  being  shared  collectively.  Moreover,  while  the  death 
of  an  ordinary  sacrificer  destroys  the  rite,  in  the  case  of  a 
Sattra  the  place  of  any  one  incapacitated  can  be  taken  by 
another  priest,  who,  however,  obtains  no  share  of  the  result. 
Only  Brahmans  again  can  eat  the  remnants  of  sacrifice,  so 
that,  if  a  Ksatriya  has  a  Soma  sacrifice  performed  for  him, 
he  must  be  given  to  drink  a  substitute  for  Soma  remnants. 
On  the  other  hand,  the  threefold  duty  of  sacrifice  to  the 
gods,  of  Vedic  study  as  payment  of  debts  to  the  Rsis,  and  of 
the  begetting  of  children  as  a  debt  to  the  Fathers,  is  incum 
bent  on  all  these  classes,  not  merely  on  those  who  may  wish 
to  attain  the  benefits  of  these  actions  (VI,  2,  31).  Again  he 
only  may  perform  the  Visvajit  (VI,  7)  who  can  afford  a  fee 
of  1,200  gold  pieces,  but,  when  he  is  bidden  to  give  up  all  in 
it,  that  applies  only  to  his  riches,  not  to,  e.g.  his  parents,  and 
of  his  riches  there  are  excluded  lands,  horses,  and  slaves  in 
personal  attendance,  while  the  1,000  years  of  performance  is 
interpreted  as  so  many  days. 

In  addition  to  these  divisions  according  to  content 
injunctions  can  be  classified  on  the  basis  of  the  knowledge 
already  possessed  by  the  agent  of  the  mode  of  performance 
or  actions  possible.1  Thus  an  original  injunction  (apurva- 

1  Kumarila  on  Mlmamsa  Sutra,  I,  2,  42  ;  Arthasamgraha,  pp.  17, 
18  ;  Mlmamsaparibhasa,  pp.  10-12,  41. 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION      93 

vidhi)  is  one  which  enjoins  something  otherwise  unknown, 
as  when  a  direction  is  given  that  grains  are  to  be  washed. 
A  restrictive  injunction  (niyamavidhi}  serves  to  fix  as  alone 
valid  one  out  of  several  possible  means  of  carrying  out 
such  an  action,  such  as  the  husking  of  grain,  which  an 
injunction  requires  to  be  performed  by  pounding.  An 
injunction  of  limitation  or  exclusion  (parisamkhyavidhi) 
precludes  one  of  several  alternatives  which  otherwise  might 
be  resorted  to;  thus  the  injunction,  "Five  animals  among 
animals  with  five  nails  may  be  eaten,"  precludes  the  eating 
of  any  animals  not  having  that  adornment.  In  this  case  the 
preclusion  is  implied,  in  other  cases  it  may  be  explicit. 

While  an  injunction  directs  a  positive  act,  a  prohibition 
(nisedha)  serves  to  turn  a  man  away  from  performing  the 
action  expressed  in  the  verb  and  its  object.  The  prohibition 
does  not  lead  to  any  desirable  result  such  as  heaven;  it 
serves  none  the  less  a  useful  purpose;  the  man,  who  obeys 
the  direction  not  to  eat  the  mysterious  Kalanja,  by  observing 
this  taboo  escapes  the  hell  which  else  had  been  his  fate.  In 
the  technical  phraseology  of  the  Mimamsa  the  negative  applies 
not  to  the  sense  of  the  verb,  but  to  the  optative  affix;  as  an 
optative  urges  us  to  action,  so  a  negatived  optative  turns 
away  from  it.  In  certain  cases,  however,  this  normal  con 
dition  of  affairs  is  precluded,  and  the  negative  is  immediately 
connected  with  the  verbal  sense.  Of  these  the  most 
important  is  the  case  (IV,  1,  3-6)  of  negative  passages 
headed,  "  His  vows  are  as  follows."  The  Brahmacarin  is 
under  an  obligation  not  to  look  at  the  sun  as  a  vow;  the 
force  of  this  is  not  that  he  is  to  avoid  the  evil  result  of 
looking,  for  there  is  no  such  result,  but,  as  the  context 
indicates,  he  is  to  effect  the  destruction  of  evil  by  the 
resolution  of  not-looking  at  the  sun.  A  similar  mode  of 
interpreting  an  apparent  prohibition  is  seen  in  the  case  of 
the  rule,  "  He  should  say,  '  Ho,  we  sacrifice,'  at  the  begin 
ning  of  all  sacrificial  verses,  but  not  at  the  Anuyaja 
offerings."  The  reason  for  this  procedure  is  that,  if  the 
rule  were  regarded  as  a  prohibition  proper,  then  it  would 
necessarily  follow  that  there  was  an  antecedent  rule  enjoin 
ing  the  action,  since  a  prohibition  implies  a  previous  rule  to 
the  opposite  effect,  and,  this  being  so,  the  result  of  the 


94  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

prohibition  would  not  be  what  was  desired,  since,  owing  to 
the  equal  validity  of  all  Vedic  sentences,  the  only  result 
would  be  to  make  the  action  optional.  Thus,  instead  of  a 
prohibition,  we  have  what  is  technically  styled  a  Paryudasa, 
and  the  sense  of  the  rule  is  that  the  words,  "  Ho,  we 
sacrifice,"  which  are  uttered  with  the  sacrificial  verses,  are 
to  be  uttered  with  those  verses  only  which  do  not  occur  in 
Anuyajas. 

These  are  the  main  topics,  which,  with  numerous  excur 
sions  into  subsidiary  detail,  fill  Padas  II-IV  of  Adhyaya 
I  and  Adhyayas  II-VI  of  the  Mlmdmsd  Sutra,  The 
next  two  Adhyayas  deal  with  the  transfer  of  details  from 
the  archetype  to  sacrifices  whose  form  is  derived  from 
it,  a  discussion  rendered  necessary  by  the  fact  that  in 
the  Brahmanas  there  are  many  cases  in  which  it  is 
presumed  that  the  details  of  one  offering  will  be  supplied 
from  another,  as  in  the  often-quoted  case  of  the  Isu 
offering  which  is  based  on  the  Syena.  The  transference 
(atidesa)  applies  not  merely  to  the  mode  of  performance, 
but  to  materials  and  other  details.1  It  is  regulated  by- 
context  (prakarana)  or  position;  thus  the  Isu  offering 
follows  the  Syena  model,  because  they  are  enjoined  in  the 
same  context.  The  rule  of  position  again  lays  it  down  that 
the  deity  of  the  original  offering  is  to  take  the  same  place 
in  the  transferred  offering,  and  the  offering  material  is 
also  to  be  transferred.  Transfer  takes  place  by  express 
injunction,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Isu  offering;  by  implied 
injunction,  as  in  the  case  of  the  offering  to  Surya,  which  is 
based  on  the  new  and  full  moon  offerings;  by  mention  of 
the  name  of  a  sacrifice,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Masagni- 
hotra,  which  is  made  in  accordance  with  the  Agnihotra;  or 
by  mention  of  the  name  of  a  purification  (samskara),  as 
when,  the  Avabhrtha  being  mentioned  at  the  Varunapraghasa, 
it  is  performed  like  the  Avabhrtha,  or  concluding  bath,  of 
the  Agnistoma  where  the  rite  is  purificatory. 

The  process  of  transfer,  however,  frequently  involves 
modifications  (iiha)  in  the  Mantras  used  to  accompany  the 
rites,  in  order  to  adapt  them  to  the  change  of  circumstance. 

1  PrakaranapancikS,  p.  227  (v.  13). 


RULES  OF  RITUAL  INTERPRETATION     95 

Elaborate  rules  are  accordingly  given  in  Adhyaya  IX 
of  the  Sutra  on  this  head.  Nor  only  Mantras  are  altered, 
but  also  Samans ;  thus  at  the  Vaisyastoma  the  Kanvarathan- 
tara  replaces  the  orginal  Brhat  and  Rathantara  Samans. 
In  some  cases  purifications  are  modified;  thus  the  wild  rice 
(nivara)  used  at  the  Vajapeya  offering,  in  place  of  the 
ordinary  rice,  is  subjected  to  the  processes  of  purification 
applicable  to  the  latter.  In  other  cases  Mantras  are  not 
altered,  but  the  number  of  times  of  their  use  is  modified. 

In  other  cases  the  transference  must  be  accompanied  by 
the  annulment  of  details  which  are  now  inappropriate. 
The  cases  in  which  this  occurs,  enumerated  in  Adhyaya  X, 
are  numerous  and  complicated;  thus  an  act  may  by  change 
be  rendered  useless;  in  the  Prajapatya  rite,  based  on  the 
new  and  full  moon  sacrifices,  grains  of  gold  replace  rice 
grains,  and  the  operations  of  husking  and  washing  are 
therefore  annulled.  Again,  if  Yajus  Mantras  are  given  to 
be  recited  as  Nigadas,  which  are  invitations  and  therefore 
must  be  said  aloud,  the  normal  rule  of  muttering  of  Yajus 
Mantras  is  annulled  in  favour  of  the  necessary  loud 
utterance.  Annulment,  again,  may  be  partial  or  complete, 
arid  the  later  text  books  take  special  pleasure  in  developing 
the  diverse  forms  in  which  it  may  appear.  Opposed  to 
annulment  is  combination  (samuccaya)  in  which  the  new 
details  of  the  derivative  form  are  only  added  to  the  details 
of  the  original  offering. 

In  Adhyaya  XI  the  question  is  raised  of  th?  relation 
of  subsidiary  to  principal  offerings  as  regards  repetition  of 
performance.  In  certain  cases  a  single  performance  of 
subsidiaries  gives  effective  aid  to  more  than  one  principal 
action,  as  in  the  case  of  the  Agnyadhana,  which  need 
only  once  be  performed,  the  same  consecrated  fire  serving 
for  all  subsequent  sacrifices;  this  aid  is  styled  Tantra. 
On  the  other  hand,  some  subsidiaries  must  be  repeated  with 
each  principal  offering  ;  thus  the  subsidiaries  of  the  rites 
performed  at  new  and  full  moon  respectively  in  those  offer 
ings  are  nearly  the  same,  but  the  lapse  of  time  between  the 
two  rites  renders  the  repetition  of  the  subsidiaries  essential  ; 
this  case  is  styled  Avapa.  But  in  some  cases  where  a  sub 
sidiary  is  merely  performed  for  the  purpose  of  aiding  one 


96  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

principal  operation,  it  may  nonetheless  aid  also  another 
principal  operation;  thus  the  fore-offerings  for  the  victim  to 
Agni  and  Soma  at  the  Soma  sacrifice  serve  for  the  cake 
offering  also,  and,  if  an  altar  has  been  made  ready  for  a 
Soma  sacrifice,  the  sacrificer  may  perform  an  Isti  with  it,  if 
he  will.  This  form  is  termed  Prasanga. 

Finally,  in  Adhyaya  XII  the  topic  of  options  (vikalpa) 
is  disposed  of  ;  options  are  of  many  kinds,1  indicated  by 
reasoning,  or  by  direct  declaration,  or  depending  on  the 
wish  of  the  agent ;  nineteen  subdivisions  of  each  type  are 
made,  of  which  eight  depend  on  the  option  furthering  the 
performance  of  the  rite,  and  eleven  on  its  bringing  about 
some  benefit  for  the  agent.  By  another  principle  of  divi 
sion  options  are  classed  as  limited  or  fixed  (vy  avast  hit  a) 
and  unlimited  (avyavasthita) ,  each  class  again  being  sub 
divided  according  as  it  rests  on  reasoning  or  declaration. 
But  options  as  a  rule  are  open  to  many  objections,  though 
this  defect  does  not  apply  either  to  fixed  options,  or  to  those 
which  depend  on  the  will  of  the  agent.  The  subjects  to 
which  options  may  apply  are  most  varied,  the  use  or  non-use 
of  certain  Mantras,  preference  for  one  colour  or  another, 
the  choice  of  kinds  of  grain,  mode  of  action,  and  so  forth. 

1  MimamsabdlaprakaSa,  p.  152  ;  Mlmamsaparibhasa,  pp.  41-44 


VI 

THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW 

THE  fact  that  the  MImamsa  is  an  investigation  of  texts 
in  order  to  evolve  an  orderly  system  for  their  interpretation 
as  a  harmonious  whole  brings  it  immediately  into  contact 
with  legal  interpretation,  and  the  parallel  is  made  the  closer 
in  that  the  chief  object  of  the  MImamsa  is  to  determine 
injunctions,  which  are  distinct  from  those  of  civil  law  mainly 
in  the  fact  that  they  deal  with  sacrificial  rather  than  civil 
obligations,  and  are  enforced  by  spiritual  rather  than  temporal 
penalties.  Thus  as  early  as  the  Dharma  Sutras  of  Vasistha 
and  Baudhayana  we  find  that  skill  in  the  Mlmarhsa  was  con 
sidered  a  qualification  for  membership  of  a  Parisad,  to 
which  the  settlement  of  disputed  questions  of  law  was 
entrusted.  The  same  rule  reappears  in  Manu  and  in  other 
Dharmasastras,  and  Kulluka  at  the  outset  of  his  commentary 
on  Manu  expressly  states  that  he  proposes  to  follow  the 
MImamsa  principles  as  the  appropriate  method  of  interpre 
tation.  The  first  known  commentator  on  Manu  whose  work 
has  reached  us  is  Medhatithi,  who  shows  himself  an  adept 
in  the  Mimamsa  principles,  and  whose  date  is  most  probably 
to  be  placed  in  the  ninth  or  tenth  century  A.D.  The  close 
association  of  Mimamsa  and  law  is  shown  in  the  works  of 
Madhava  who  wrote  an  exposition  of  the  Parasara  Smrti,  in 
those  of  Dinakara,1  brother  of  Kamalakara,  who  added  to  his 
legal  treatises  the  Bhattadinakara  on  the  Sastradipika;  of 
his  son  Visvesvara  or  Gaga  Bhatta,  whose  Bhattacintamani 
deals  with  the  Sutra;  of  Kamalakara  himself,  and  of 
Nllakantha  who  shows  in  his  compilation,  Bhagavanta- 
bhaskara,  an  excellent  knowledge  of  the  MImamsa  topics 

1  Cf.  Mandlik,  Vyavaharamayukha,  p.  LXXV. 


98  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

with  which  his  father,  Sarhkara  Bhatta,  had  dealt.  The 
parallelism,  indeed,  of  the  two  enquiries  only  became  the  more 
salient  as  with  the  course  of  time  the  number  of  Smrtis  and 
other  texts  claiming  authority  increased,  and  the  ideal  of 
reconciling  their  conflicting  views  was  more  and  more 
strongly  held.  All  the  devices  necessary  for  such  an  end 
existed  in  the  Mlmarhsa,  and  we  can  understand  from  this 
reason  why  it  was  not  thought  necessary  or  desirable  to 
develop  a  distinct  science  of  legal  interpretation. 

Thus  the  essential  doctrine  of  injunction  in  civil  law  is 
based  on  the  principles  adopted  in  the  Mimamsa,  and  in 
the  interpretation  of  the  various  kinds  of  injunction  the 
civil  law  adapts  to  its  own  special  needs  the  maxims  of  the 
sacred  law.  The  distinction  between  injunction  proper  and 
a  restrictive  injunction  (niyama)  is  applied  in  the  sense 
that  the  latter  is  reduced  to  nothing  more  than  a  maxim 
or  rule,  which  ought  to  be  regarded,  but  which,  if  violated, 
does  not  render  the  action  affected  invalid;  thus  Manu's 
rule  as  to  marrying  an  amiable  and  healthy  girl  is  not 
an  injunction,  the  violation  of  which  renders  void  the 
marriage,  but  a  counsel  of  prudence.  The  case  of  an 
injunction  of  limitation  (parisamkhyd)  raises  difficulties,  as 
there  arises  in  regard  to  it  the  question  whether  or  not  it  is 
to  be  deemed  to  imply  a  prohibition  ;  thus,  when  the 
injunction  is  laid  down  that  the  sons  may  divide  the  family 
property  on  the  death  of  their  parents,  Jimutavahana  puts 
the  question  whether  it  is  to  be  inferred  that  they  may  do  so 
only  on  the  death  of  their  parents,  a  view  which  he  rejects. 

Negative  injunctions  also  raise  a  point  of  legal  impor 
tance  in  the  relation  of  prohibition  proper,  and  a  mere 
exception  (paryudasa).  Thus  the  general  law  of  the  succes 
sion  of  a  son  and  other  heirs  is  subject  to  the  exclusion  from 
succession  of  persons  impotent,  outcaste,  lame,  blind,  and 
suffering  from  incurable  diseases,  who  are  entitled  to 
maintenance  merely.  The  negation  in  their  case  is  essen 
tially  to  be  treated  as  an  exception  to  the  general  rule  of 
succession  ;  it,  therefore,  applies  only  to  persons  so  circum 
stanced  at  the  moment  when  the  succession  would  normally 
vest,  and,  therefore,  if  successors  become  so  afflicted  after 
becoming  entitled  to  the  succession,  the  rule  does  not  in  any 


THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW           99 

way  affect  them,  as,  of  course,  it  would  do  if  it  were  a 
prohibition  proper.1 

In  the  interpretation  of  the  Smrti  injunctions  the  same 
principles  are  applicable  as  in  the  case  of  the  interpretation 
of  the  injunctions  of  application  in  Vedic  texts.  Thus  the 
express  declaration  of  a  text  must  be  held  to  override  any 
conclusion  which  might  be  deduced  from  it  by  suggestion 
(laksana),  corresponding  to  liiiga  in  Jaimini.  The  decla 
ration  of  Manu  (IX,  104)  that  "after  the  death  of  father 
and  mother  the  sons  should  divide  the  paternal  property,  for 
they  have  no  po;ver  over  it  while  their  parents  live,"  is  an 
absolute  declaration  that  they  have  no  such  power  ;  it  is 
impossible  to  read  the  rule  as  forbidding  partition  during 
the  parents'  life,  but  acknowledging  the  power  of  the  sons 
over  the  property.  The  power  of  suggestion,  however,  has 
also  its  own  place  ;  thus  Nanda  Pandita  in  explaining  how, 
although  the  word  "substitute"  was  first  applied  specificially 
to  five  kinds  of  sons,  it  becomes  applicable  to  all  the  twelve 
kinds  legally  recognised,  adduces  the  Pranabhrt  maxim 
(I,  4,  28)  as  his  warrant.  iTanabhrt  originally  denotes  a 
Mantra  used  in  consecrating  a  brick  in  the  fire  altar ; 
thence  it  passes  to  be  the  name  of  the  brick,  and  from 
denoting  the  special  bricks  used  applies  more  generally  to 
any  brick.  The  principle  of  syntactical  connection  (vakya) 
reappears,  usually  under  the  title  Anvaya  ;  its  superiority  to 
context  (prakarana)  is  illustrated  by  Raghunandana's  discus 
sion  of  Manu's  rule  (XI,  209)  that  one  who  assaults  a 
Brahman  must  undergo  the  Krcchra  penance.  If  the  context 
is  invoked,  this  may  seem  merely  to  refer  to  the  case  of  the 
new  and  full  moon  sacrifices,  and  therefore  has  no  general 
or  civil  application,  but  the  sound  view  is  that  it  is  to  be 
treated  as  a  single  independent  proposition. 

The  term,  Arthavada,  which  plays  so  important  a  part 
in  the  Mimarhsa  discussions  is  dropped  in  legal  terminology, 
but  the  legal  texts  recognise  the  existence  of  such  passages 
in  the  Smrtis  and  deal  variously  with  them.  One  difficult 
problem  is  handled  in  the  light  of  the  maxim  of  Jaimini 
(I,  2,  19-25),  dealing  with  declarations  which  have  the 

1  Tagore  Law  Lectures,  1905,  pp.  332,  333. 


100  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

appearance  of  being  injunctions  but  are  not  really  so 
(vidhivannigadddhikarana) .  Thus  Jimutavahana x  is 
enabled  to  hold  that  the  text  which  provides  that,  "  Though 
immovables  or  bipeds  have  been  acquired  by  a  man,  no  gift 
or  sale  of  them  without  the  assent  of  his  sons,"  is  to  be 
completed  by  the  words,  "  should  be  made,"  and  not  by  the 
words  "  must  be  made."  This  interpretation  reduces  the 
sentence  to  a  mere  pious  opinion,  and  avoids  contradiction 
with  the  well-known  injunction,  which  allows  a  man  absolute 
power  of  disposal  over  property  acquired  by  his  own 
exertions,  as  opposed  to  ancestral  possessions.  The  same 
maxim,  however,  has  been  interpreted  as  supporting  the 
general  rule  that  an  injunction  for  which  a  reason  is 
adduced  is  merely  equivalent  to  an  Arthavada,  so  that 
Vasistha's  rule  against  the  adoption  of  an  only  son  is 
reduced  to  a  pious  expression  of  opinion,  because  it  is 
followed  by  the  explanation  that  a  son  is  one  who  saves 
from  hell  his  natural  father,  a  fact  which  makes  the 
adoption  of  an  only  son  undesirable.  The  Mimamsa  rule, 
however,  goes  no  further  than  to  hold  that,  if  for  a  rule 
which  has  no  known  Vedic  sanction  a  selfish  motive  can  be 
seen,  it  is  impossible  to  postulate  for  it  the  authority  of 
a  Vedic  text,  and  'the  supposed  rule  of  law  is  clearly  too 
widely  stated. 

The  obligation  of  law  to  the  Mimamsa  extends  to  every 
department  of  the  topic,  and  it  not  merely  in  matters  of 
interpretation  that  the  legal  writers  borrow  matter  from  the 
Mimamsa,  but  they  show  repeatedly  traces  of  influence  by 
the  positive  doctrines  of  that  school  in  their  bearing  on  the 
religious  aspect  of  property  and  family  rights.  The  doctrine 
of  the  three  debts  of  man,  sacrifice  to  the  gods,  study  to  the 
Rsis,  and  the  begetting  of  a  son  for  the  Fathers,  enunciated 
by  Jaimini,  affords  three  presumptions  which,  more  or  less 
effectively,  are  taken  into  account  by  the  schools  of  law.  In 
treating  the  principle  of  succession  Jimutavahana  uses,  as 
a  guiding  principle  in  reconciling  the  conflicting  statements 
of  the  Smrtis,  the  principle  of  securing  as  far  as  possible 
spiritual  welfare,  and  in  interpreting  the  rules  regarding 

1  Dayabhaga,  trans.  Colebrooke,  II,  29,  30. 


THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW         101 

self  acquisition  of  property  he  tacitly  favours  the  claims  of 
Vedic  study.  Vijnanesvara,  on  the  other  hand,  in  his 
treatment  of  the  right  of  succession  accepts  the  guidance  of 
the  importance  of  maintaining  the  institution  of  the  family. 
It  is  significant  that  in  treating  of  the  fundamental  text  of 
Gautama  on  ownership  as  derived  from  inheritance,  pur 
chase,  partition,  seizure,  or  finding,  both  Jimutavahana  and 
Vijnanesvara  appeal  to  the  Mimamsa  in  support  of  tenets 
which  are  essentially  at  variance.  The  view  of  the  former 
accepts  the  doctrine  that  in  all  these  modes  of  acquisition 
there  is  more  than  mere  physical  acquisition  concerned ;  the 
attaining  possession  must  be  in  furtherance  of  duty  in  the 
widest  sense.  This  view  he  supports  by  the  doctrine  that, 
when  the  priest  becomes  possessed  of  the  remnant  of  the 
sacrifice,  he  does  so  not  by  the  mere  act  of  acceptance,  but 
in  virtue  of  the  pious  intention  of  the  donor  in  dedicating 
the  offerings  to  the  deity.  Thus  for  him  succession  becomes 
a  matter  of  spiritual  benefit,  and  the  property  comes  to  the 
heir  not  in  virtue  of  his  acquisition  of  it,  but  by  a  species 
of  relinquishment  by  his  ancestor,  a  principle  upon  which, 
it  has  ingeniously  been  suggested,  the  lawyers  of  Bengal 
might  easily  have  built  a  doctrine  permitting  of  the  limited 
settlement  of  family  property.  Vijnanesvara,1  on  the  other 
hand,  following  a  suggestion  of  Prabhakara,  argues  that 
Jaimini  (IV,  1,  3-6)  was  of  opinion  that  property  was 
essentially  a  matter  of  popular  recognition,  and  that  the 
acquisition  of  property  by  an  action  in  breach  of  law  did 
not  deprive  the  sacrifices  made  by  means  of  it  of  full  effi 
cacy.  Hence  Vijnanesvara's  doctrine  of  succession  rests  on 
blood  kinship,  and  heritage  is  defined  by  him  as  wealth  that 
becomes  the  property  of  another  solely  by  reason  of  relation 
ship  to  the  owner.  Similarly  the  Vyavahdramayukha 
(p.  32),  in  accepting  the  purely  secular  origin  of  property, 
nonetheless  appeals  to  the  Mimamsa  treatment  (VI,  7,  1,  2) 
of  the  Visvajit  offering  in  order  to  show  that  one's  children 
are  not  included  in  the  term  "  property,"  for  when  at  that 
offering  the  sacrificer  is  supposed  to  give  away  to  the  priests 

1  On  Yajnavalkya,  II,  114;  he  cites  Guru  (p.  198,  ed.  Bombay, 
1909),  and  the  passage  is  found  in  the  Brhati  (Prabhakara  School. 
P.  312). 


102  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

his  all,  his  children  are  excluded  from  the  gift.  The  same 
passage  is  also  employed  to  express  the  limited  character  of 
the  ownership  of  a  king  or  a  feudatory;  his  actual  owner 
ship  is  restricted  to  whatever  property  he  has  acquired ;  his 
position  towards  the  territory  is  one  of  sovereignty  or  suzer- 
anity,  entitling  him  to  a  maintenance  but  not  to  true  owner 
ship;  when  a  king  is  said  to  give  a  village,  he  does  not  trans 
fer  the  ownership  of  the  land,  which  is  not  his  to  give,  but 
assigns  to  the  donee  the  right  of  drawing  a  maintenance 
from  the  village. 

The  Mimamsa  also  affords  guidance  to  Vijnanesvara 
(II,  136)  in  a  variety  of  details  in  connection  with  heritage 
and  partition.  The  claim  of  woman  to  inherit  is 
questioned  on  the  ground  that,  as  property  is  intended  for 
sacrificial  purposes  and  as  save  along  with  her  husband  a 
woman  has  no  locus  standi  as  a  sacrificer,  on  the  interpreta 
tion  of  the  Mimamsa  Sutra  (VI,  1,  17-21)  adopted  in  the 
commentators,  there  is  no  ground  for  her  having  the  right  of 
inheritance.  This  illiberal  doctrine  is  disposed  of  by  appeal 
to  another  passage  of  the  Mimamsa  Sutra  (III,  4,  26)  in 
which  it  refers  to  ornaments  of  gold  worn  by  the  priests  and 
the  sacrificer,  though  serving  no  sacrificial  purpose.  The 
exact  share  of  a  wife  raises  difficulties  in  view  of  the  con 
flicting  interpretation  of  the  two  main  texts,  the  first  of  which 
provides  that,  if  an  owner  divides  property  in  his  lifetime, 
he  should  make  his  wives  have  equal  shares  with  his  sons; 
and  the  second,  that  on  partition  after  the  death  of  the 
husband  the  wife  should  have  a  share  equal  to  that  of  her 
sons.  These  passages  are  interpreted  by  some  authorities  to 
mean  that,  if  the  property  is  extensive,  she  is  to  have  a  mere 
subsistence  from  the  estate,  while,  if  it  is  small,  she  is  to 
have  an  equal  share.  This  view  is  rejected  on  the  strength 
of  the  principle  upheld  by  Jaimini  (VII,  3,  19-25)  that,  so 
long  as  a  text  can  yield  a  single  coherent  meaning,  it  is  not 
right  to  treat  it  as  broken  into  two  incongruous  parts.  Simi 
larly  it  is  on  the  Mimamsa  rule  (V,  1,  4-7)  of  following  the 
order  of  things  mentioned  in  a  certain  order  that  is  based 
the  claim  that,  when  the  parents  of  a  childless  son  succeed 
to  his  property,  the  mother  has  a  prior  claim,  because  the 
term  parents  (pitarau)  is  explained  in  grammatical  treatises 


THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW         103 

as  mother  and  father  (matdpitarau),  and  not  as  father  and 
mother.  Another  appeal  to  the  Mimamsa  doctrine  is  made 
in  regard  to  Yajnavalkya's  doctrine  (II,  126)  that  a 
coparcener,  who  at  the  time  of  partition  withholds  part  of 
the  property,  must  give  it  up  for  division.  The  question 
arises  whether  the  action  is  reprehensible  or  not,  and  is 
decided  in  the  affirmative  because  in  the  Mimamsa  (VI,  3,  20) 
it  is  ruled  that  a  man  who  substitutes  one  form  of  meal  for 
another,  even  if  acting  under  a  genuine  misapprehension,  still 
does  wrong,  so  that,  even  if  the  coparcener  had  some  right 
to  the  property  and  regarded  it  as  his  own,  his  conduct  is 
censurable.  Jimutavahana,  as  often,  differs  in  part  from 
Vijnanesvara,  and  extenuates  the  action.  On  a  strict 
interpretation  by  Mimamsa  principles  again,  it  is  not 
impossible  to  argue  that  Jimutavahana  does  not  allow  the 
disposal  by  will  by  a  father  of  inherited  property  without 
provision  being  made  for  the  maintenance  of  the  sons;  the 
conflicting  view  of  the  Privy  Council  is  clearly  hard  to 
reconcile  with  the  principles  of  Mimamsa.1 

Adoption,  like  inheritance,  affords  a  fruitful  field^for  the 
application  of  Mimamsa  principles.2  The  right  of  a  Sudra  to 
adopt,  which  is  denied  in  the  Suddhiviveka,  on  the  ground 
that  adoption  must  be  accompanied  by  Vedic  Mantras  and 
an  oblation  which  he  cannot  as  a  Sudra  have  performed,  is 
vindicated  on  the  ground  of  the  occurrence  of  a  certain  offer 
ing  for  a  Nisadasthapati  (VI,  1,  51)  in  the  Veda,  although  a 
Nisada  is  normally  as  a  Sudra  excluded  from  any  Vedic 
rite.  The  Mantras  can  then  be  recited  by  an  Aryan.  A 
woman,  again,  can  only  adopt  with  the  permission  of  her 
husband,  as  she  cannot  by  herself  perform  Vedic  rites  and 
ceremonies  (VI,  1,6).  Again,  a  child  when  adopted  cannot 
inherit  his  father's  property  or  perform  his  Sraddha,  accord 
ing  to  Manu;  this  rule,  though  restricted  to  these  two  facts, 
must  be  understood  to  apply  generally  on  the  analogy  of 
terms  like  antarvedi  in  the  Mimamsa  (III,  7, 13, 14),  which 
means  not  merely  at  the  centre  of  the  altar,  but  anywhere 
within  it.  By  another  maxim  Nilakantha  decides  that 

1  Tagore  Law  Lectures,  1905,  pp.  405-11. 

2  Vyavaharamayukha  (ed.  Bombay,  1880),  pp.  40  ff. 


104  THE  KARMA-MlMAMSA 

Saunaka's  text,  which  asserts  that  the  son  of  a  daughter  and 
the  son  of  a  sister  are  adopted  by  Sudras,  is  to  be  read  to  mean 
that  these  adoptions  are  generally  permissible,  and  that  they 
are  specially  so  in  the  case  of  Sudras :  the  maxim  used  is  the 
Maitravaruna,  which  rests  on  the  interpretation  of  the 
two  sentences,  "  He  hands  over  a  staff  to  the  Maitravaruna 
priest;  he  initiates  or  invokes  by  means  of  the  staff."  The 
accepted  opinion  is  that  the  handing  over  of  the  staff  is  a 
distinct  injunction,  the  initiation  or  invocation  subsidiary, 
and  so  here  the  part  of  the  Sudra  is  only  subsidiary  to 
an  established  rule.  Samkara  Bhatta,  his  father,  whom 
Nilakantha  cites,  expressly  applies  to  the  Sudra  the  duty 
of  paying  his  debt  to  the  Fathers,  which  is  asserted  of  the 
Brahman  as  an  instance  in  the  Mimamsa  Sutra. 

Similar  use  of  the  Mimamsa  is  made  in  the  same  con 
nection  by  Nanda  Pandita  in  the  Dattakamlmamsa 
(c.  1600  A.D.).  Thus  on  the  analogy  of  the  Vaisvadeva, 
which  is  a  maxim  (I,  4,  13-16)  laying  down  that  in  the  case 
of  such  a  word  as  that  the  conventional  sense  is  to  be  fol 
lowed  in  lieu  of  the  etymological,  he  holds  (VI,  27)  that  the 
term  sapinda  used  of  relationship  is  not  to  be  restricted  to 
the  exact  meaning  suggested  by  the  word  as  a  compound. 
So  also,  in  order  to  meet  the  objection  of  Medhatithi  to  an 
adopted  son  on  the  ground  that  the  duty  of  man  is  fulfilled 
only  by  begetting  a  son,  he  adduces  (I,  41)  the  maxim 
(VI,  3,  31)  of  the  substitution  of  the  Putika  for  the  Soma 
plant.  In  determining  the  value  of  substitution  the  mode  in 
which  the  substitute  originated  is  unimportant,  the  question 
is  whether  it  can  serve  its  purpose  adequately,  and  this  an 
adopted  son  can  easily  do.  Again,  the  objection  to  the  rule 
that  an  adoptive  father  must  perform  the  birth  ceremony  for 
an  adopted  child,  though  adoption  is  permitted  up  to  the 
fifth  year,  is  met  by  the  use  of  the  maxim  (V,  4,  5-14)  that, 
when  a  difficulty  arises  as  to  the  order  of  performance  of 
offerings,  reason  and  necessity  must  be  consulted,  whence  it 
follows  that  the  performance  of  the  birth  ceremony  is  in  order 
though  tardy.  The  author  of  the  Dattakacandrika  similarly 
appeals  to  the  Mimamsa  doctrine(IV,  1,  22-24)of  the  relation 
of  the  principal  and  incidental  aspects  of  an  action,  in  order 
to  support  his  view  that,  if  one  of  two  co-widows  adopt,  the 


THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW         105 

child  becomes  the  adopted  child  of  the  other  as  well.  As  the 
principal  purpose  of  the  action  is  to  provide  offspring  for  the 
dead  husband,  the  result  of  doing  so  is  that  the  son  occupies 
the  same  position  to  either  widow,  this  being  a  mere  incidental 
matter.  The  same  text  elsewhere  cites  the  Kapinjala 
maxim  (XI,  1,  38-45)  which  indicates  that,  when  the 
plural  number  is  used  in  any  injunction,  in  the  absence  of 
necessity  requiring  that  a  larger  number  should  be  deemed 
to  be  meant,  the  needs  of  the  situation  are  fully  met  by 
restricting  the  number  to  three,  the  minimum  indicated. 

The  sacrificial  practice  yields  one  obvious  contribution  to 
the  law  of  partnership,  such  as  those  of  trading  companies, 
bodies  of  actors,  and  agricultural  concerns.  The  rule  is 
laid  down  that  the  returns  are  to  be  divided  among  the 
partners  according  to  the  amounts  of  their  respective  invest 
ments,  on  the  analogy  of  the  distribution  of  the  sacrificial  fees 
among  the  officiating  priests  (X,  3,  53-55).  Thus,  of  one 
hundred  cows  twelve  are  given  to  each  of  the  four  principal 
priests,  six  to  the  next  four,  four  each  to  the  next  four,  and 
three  each  to  the  last  group,  the  amounts  being  allocated  in 
accordance  with  the  comparative  importance  of  their  contri 
bution  to  the  carrying  out  of  the  offering. 

In  the  domain  of  quasi-criminal  law  Raghunandana 
solves  a  difficulty  by  the  application  of  the  analogy  of  the 
principle  of  Tantra,  where  a  single  performance  of  an 
action  serves  the  purpose  of  more  than  one  principal  offering. 
The  problem  is  raised  in  the  case  of  the  rule  that  the  assailant 
of  a  Brahman  must  perform  the  Krcchra  penance  on  pain 
of  punishment;  if,  then,  one  offends  against  five  Brahmans, 
is  the  penance  to  be  performed  five  times  ?  The  answer  on 
the  Tantra  principle  is  in  the  negative.  Medhatithi  again 
has  recourse  to  the  Mimamsa  maxim  of  Grahaikatva  (III, 
1,  13-15).  which  holds  that  in  a  general  injunction  the 
singular  includes  the  plural  and  the  masculine  the  feminine, 
in  order  to  solve  the  doubt  raised  by  the  rule  of  Manu  (V, 
90)  that  a  Brahman  must  not  drink  spirituous  liquor,  an 
ingenious  objector  having  suggested  that  the  text  is  restrict 
ed  in  its  application  to  such  action  by  a  single  male  Brah 
man.  The  maxim,  it  will  be  seen,  differs  entirely  in  its 
effect  from  that  given  above,  which  in  sacrifices  and  on 


106  THE  KARMA-MIMAMSA 

other  occasions  reduces  a  plural  to  its  bare  meaning  of 
three. 

Even  more  interesting  is  a  case  in  which  the  law  of 
evidence  is  influenced  by  the  Mimamsa  doctrine  of  the  self 
validity  of  cognitions.  Yajnavalkya  lays  down  (II,  80) 
that,  if  a  man  has  brought  forward  witnesses,  yet  if  at  a  later 
period  he  can  produce  more  satisfactory  testimony,  the 
evidence  already  adduced  is  to  be  discredited.  This  pro 
cedure,  at  first  sight  drastic,  is  justified  b>  the  adduction  in 
the  Mitaksard  of  the  arguments  adduced  by  the  Vrttikara  in 
support  of  the  self-evidence  of  cognitions.  Evidence  is 
prima  facie  valid,  unless  it  can  be  shown  that  the  witness 
could  not  have  known  the  facts,  that  his  means  of  knowl 
edge  were  defective  (kdranadosa) ,  or  his  evidence  is 
displaced  by  other  evidence,  that  is,  the  first  cognition  is 
sublated  by  a  second  cognition.  Immediately  after,  Vijnanes- 
vara  (II,  83)  has  recourse  to  the  Mimamsa  to  provide  a 
suitable  penance  for  the  witness  whom  he  enjoins  to  with 
hold  evidence  or  testimony,  where  the  proof  of  the  charge 
would  result  in  the  infliction  of  the  capital  penalty  ;  in 
these  cases  the  usual  punishment  of  a  fine,  or  in  the  case 
of  a  Brahman  banishment,  is  not  in  point  ;  still,  to  do  away 
with  the  sin  of  the  deviation  from  the  truth  the  performance 
of  a  special  offering,  the  Sarasvatesti,  given  in  the  Mimamsa, 
is  prescribed. 

As  is  natural,  the  obligations  of  the  law  books  to  the 
Mimamsa  principles  are  still  more  marked  in  those  parts  of 
those  treatises  which  deal,  not  with  civil  law  (vyavahdra)  in 
the  narrower  sense  of  the  term,  but  with  religious  custom 
and  penances.  Even  in  the  civil  law,  however,  there  is  one 
point  on  which  the  law  books  differ  in  essentials  from 
Jaimini  ;  it  was  necessary  for  the  latter,  in  support  of  his 
doctrine  of  the  eternity  of  the  Veda,  to  maintain  that  its 
commands  are  universal,  and  thus  he  treats  even  Smrti  texts 
which  contain  injunctions  expressed  as  local  practises 
as  really  laying  down  general  principles.  In  the  practical 
needs  of  the  law,  however,  the  utmost  value  is  always 
attached  to  local  customs,  and  the  practice  of  good 
men,  which  thus  in  effect  comes  to  outweigh  maxims  in 
Smrtis,  if  in  any  place  these  are  not  followed.  Yet 


THE  MIMAMSA  AND  HINDU  LAW         107 

Jaimini's  insistence  on  the  supreme  value  of  the  Veda  in  all 
questions  was  not  without  effect;  the  tendency  in  the 
Smrtis  is,  in  harmony  no  doubt  with  a  common  practice,  to 
allot  in  the  case  of  partition  of  property  a  larger  share  to 
the  eldest  son  than  to  the  others.  But  there  is  Vedic 
authority  for  the  statement  that  Manu  divided  his  property 
in  equal  shares  among  his  sons,  and  this  doctrine  has  finally 
prevailed  in  the  law,  despite  the  efforts  of  some  of  the 
compilers  of  digests  to  compromise  the  matter  in  order  to 
obey  the  clear  directions  of  the  Smrtis.1  In  the  legal 
schools,  again,  it  has  been  found  necessary  to  assign  relative 
weight  to  Puranas  and  Smrtis,  a  distinction  which  is  not 
found  in  Kumarila,  who  accepts  the  Puranas  on  the  same 
basis  as  the  Smrtis.  In  the  case  of  a  divergence  between 
Smrti  and  Purana  the  former  should  prevail  in  the  view  of 
Vyasa;  the  Purana  represents  no  more  than  custom,  while 
the  Smrti  is  a  step  nearer  to  Sruti.2 

While  the  Mimamsa  thus  stands  in  close  relation  with 
Indian  law,  in  its  enunciation  of  principles  in  the  form  of 
brief  maxims  (nydya),  comparable  with  the  headnotes  of 
modern  law  reports,  it  stands  in  equally  close  relation  with 
the  popular  vogue  of  maxims3  framed  on  the  model  whence 
the  Mimamsa  use  is  doubtless  derived.  Such  popular 
maxims  are  freely  cited  by  the  text-books  of  the  school,  and 
it  was  presumbly  on  their  analogy  that  the  Adhikarana 
headings  were  derived;  the  remarkable  divergence  of  the 
commentators4  in  allotting  Sutras  to  Adhikaranas  indicates 
that  the  latter  were  not  a  primitive  constituent  of  the  Sutra 
text. 

1  Cf.  Mandlik,  trans,  of  Vyavaharamayukha,  p.  41,  n.  1. 

2  Tagore  Law  Lectures,   1905,    pp.    234,    235  ;    d.,    however, 
Mandlik,  op.  cit .  p.  xxx. 

3  See  Col.  Jacob's  Lankikany&ydnjali  (2nd  ed.,  3  parts). 
*  Above    pp.  4,  13.     So  in  the  Veddnta  Sutra. 


INDEX 


A  CTION,  56,  66 
•rA     Actions,  classification  of, 

85,86 

Adoption,  103 ,  104 
Adhikarana,  4,  13,  107 
Air,  53,  54 
Aita§ayana,  4 
Alayavijnana,  47 
Analogy,  32,  33 
Anandagiri,  11 
Anantadeva,  13 
Angapurva,  75 
Annulment  of  rites,  95 
Anubhuti,  17 
Anumana,  30 
Anusanga,  82 
Anuvyavasaya,  22,  50 
Anvaya,  99 
Apastamba,  2 
Apadeva,  13,  76,  78 
Apoha,  40 
Appayya  Diksita,  12 
Apprehension,  validity  of,  17-20 
Aprama.  17 

Apurva,  36,  73,  74,75,  89 
Arthapatti,  33,  34 
Arthasamgraha,  13 
Arthavada,  80,  83,  88,  99,  100 
Aryadeva,  7 
Asanga,  46 
A§vaghosa,  7 
Atheism,  61 

Atomic  theory,  50,  54,  61,  62 
Atreya,  4 
Aupavarsas,'71 
Avapa,  95 
Aversion,  54,  55,  68 

DADARAYANA,  4,  5,  35,  77 
u     Badari,4,  88 
Baudhdyana  Dharma  Sutra,  97 
Bhagavadgitd,  73,  76 
Bhdmatl,  16 
Bhartrhari,  11,  36  n. 
Bhartrmitra,  8 
Bhasarvajna,  32 


Bhatta  Dinakara,  12,  97 

Bhatta  Samkara,  12,  98 

Bhattabhdskara,  13 

Bhdttacintamani,  12,  97 

Bhattalamkara,  13 

Bhdttarahasya,  13 

Bhavadasa,  7 

Bhavanatha  Mi§ra,  12 

Bhavana,  75,  76 

Bodhayana,  8 

Body,  67,  69  ;  of  creator,  62,  63 

Brahman,  36  n.,  39,  76,  77 

Brahruanas,  Mimamsa  in,  1;  re 
cognise  soul,  68  ;  contents  of, 
79-81 

Brhatl,  9,  101  n. 

Buddhist  views,  6,  7,  14,  30,  40, 
65,  84  ;  and  see  Vijnanavada 
and  !§unyavada. 

/CATEGORIES,  52,  53 

^     Cause,  23,  24,  59,  60 

Chandogya  Upanisad,  77 

Cidananda,  28 

Class  signification  of  words,  39 

Classification  of  actions,  85,  86 

Cognition,  validity  of,  17-20  ; 
mode  of  apprehension  of,  20- 
22,  45,  46,  49,  50,  68,  70,  71  ; 
of  soul,  70,  71;  as  quality  of 
soul,  67 

Colour,  54,  55 

Conjunction,  54,  55  ;  in  percep 
tion,  23,  26,  35 

Construction,  rales  of,  81,  82, 
86,  87,  89,  99 

Convention,  as  basis  of  lan 
guage,  36 

Co-partners,  103 

Creator,  existence  of  denied, 
36,  43,  61-64 

Custom,  value  of,  85,  106,  107 

r\ANA,  86 

^     Darkness,  53,  54 
Dattakacandrika,  104 


INDEX 


109 


Dattakamimdmsa ,  104 
Deities,  in  sacrifice,  74,  77,  78,  81 
Demerit,  55,  62,  67,  68,  71 
Desire,  54,  55,  66,  67 
Determinate  perception,  24,  25 
Devatasvarupavicara,  78 
Dharma,  4,  35 
Dharma  Sutras,  Mimamsa  in,  2, 

3,  97 

Dharmakirti,  9  n.,  14,  24 
Dhvani,  55 
Dignaga,  14,  24,  27,  28,  29,  30, 

48,  52 

Dimension,  54,  55,  68 
Dinakara  Bhatta,  12,  97 
Disjunction,  54,  55 
Dream  cognition,  18,  44,  45 

ETFFORT,  54,  55 

*-*     Ekavakyata,  82 

Elasticity,  55 

Error,  19,  20 

Eternity,   of    word,   37-39  ;    of 

Veda,  42,  43,  106 
Ether,  37,  38,  53,_54 
Evidence.  Mimamsa  rules  as 

affecting  law  of,  106 

|7ALLAClES,doctrineof,  30-32 
r     Fire,  53,  54 
Fluidity,  55 

(~*  AGA,  or  VisveSvara,  Bhatta, 
^     12,  97 

GangeSa,  15 

Gautama,  77 

Generality,  26,  56-58  ;  cf.  50,  51 

Gesture,  as  a  Pramana,  43 

God,  36,  61-64,  76 

Gopala  Bhatta,  12 

Govinda,  76" 

Grahaikatva,  105 

Grammar,  value  of,  84,  85 

Gravity,  55 

Gunaratna,  15,  76 

Guru, i.e.  Prabhakara,  9, 101  n. 

LJARI,  8 

1  *     Haribhadra,  15 
Hearing,  38,  39 
Homa,  86 


IDEAS,  how  known,  20-22,45, 
46,  49,  50,  68,  70,  71 

Imagination,  function  of  in 
knowledge,  24,  25 

Inmortality,  64,  65,  72 

Import  of  words,  39,  40 

Impression,  49,  55,  66,  68 

Indeterminate  perception,  24 
25;  alone  valid,  52  n. 

Individuality,  25,  54,  55,  68 

Inference,  27-32 

Infinite  regress,  18,  22,  28 

Inherence,  26,  54,  58 

Injunction,  35,  74,  75,  85-94,  98 

Intrinsic  validity  of  apprehen 
sion.  17-20 

Isu,94 

ISvara,  76 

IsVarakrsna,  59 

Interpretation,  rules  of  Vedic, 
79_-96 

Itihasa,  authority  of,  82,  83 

TAIMINI,  4,  5,  35,  76,  77,  78,  79, 
J     88,  91,  99_,  106 
Jaiminiyanyayamalavistara,  12 
Jaiminisutrabhasya,  14 
Jain  views,  32  n.,  34,  38,  68,  69 
Jayanta_Bhatta,  14,  15 
Jimutavahana,  100,  101,  103 
Jivadeva,  13 

K'ALANJA,  93 

^    Kanada,  77 

Kamalakara,  12,  97 

Kapila,  77 

Kapinjala,  a  Nyaya,  105 

KaSika,  10 

KeSava,  13 

Khandadeva,  12,  13 

Knowledge,  theory  of,  17-43  ; 
and  liberation,  72,  73 

Krcchra,  105 

Krsna  Diksita,  13 

Kulluka,  97 

Kumarila,  6,  7,  9,  10,  14,  15, 
17-19,  21,  22,  25,  27,  28,  30,  34, 
35,  38,40,41,46,49,52,53,61, 
64,  69,  71,  73,  74,  75,  79,  80, 
82,  83_,  85,  90 

Kusumanjali,  14 


110 


THE    KARMA-MIMAMSA 


I  ABUKAYANA,  4 
*-•    Laksana  or  Linga,  89,  99 
Language,  origin  of,  36,  37 
Laugaksi  Bhaskara,  13,  76 
Law,  Mimamsa   principles    in, 

97-107 

Liberation,  72-74 
Like,  known  by  like,  23 
Logic,  14,  17-43. 

|V/[ADHAVA,  3,  4,  12,  15,  97 

1V1     Madhyamikas,  46,  47 

Mahdbhdrata,  5,  7 

Mahdbhdsya,  5  n. 

Mahadeva  Vedantin,  12 

Maitravaruna,  a  Nyaya,  104 

Manadeva,  14 

Manameyodaya,  14 

Mandana  MiSra,  11,  16 

Mantra,  81,  82  ;  Uha  of,  94,  95 

Manu,  82,  97,  98,  103 

Matter,  50,  53,  54,  61,  67,  69 

Mayukhamalikd,  12 

Meaning,  relation  of  to  word, 
35,36 

Medhatithi,  98,  104 

Memory,  19,  20,  25,  66,  67,  68 

Mental  perception,  20,  50  ;  and 
see  mind. 

Merit,  55,  62,  67,  68,  71 

Metaphysics,  44-78 

Mimamsa,  1 

Mimdmsd  Sutra,  3-7,  37  n  ;  con 
tents,  79-96 

MimdmsdbdlaprakdSa,  13 

Mlmamsaka,  3,  5  n. 

Mimdmsdkaustubha,  12 

Mimdmsdnayaviveka,  12 

Mlmdmsdnukramam,  12 

MimdmsdnydyaprakdSa,  13 

Mimdmsdmakaranda,  14 

Mimdmsdpddukd,  14 

Mimdmsdparibhdsd,  13 

Mimamsdratna,  13 

Mlmdmsdsdrasamgraha,  13 

Mind,  23,  24,  68,  69,  70  ;  and  see 
Mental  Perception. 

Mitdksard,  9,  106 

Mode  of  apprehension  of  cogni 
tion,  20-22,  45,  46,  49,  50,  68, 
70,  71  ;  of  soul,  70,  71 


Motion,  56,  66 

MAGARJUNA,  6,  44 

1  ^     Name,  80,  81 

Nanda  Pandita,  99, 104 

Ndyakaratna,  12 

Narayana,  14 

Narayana,  of  Kerala,  14 

Narayanatlrtha  Muni,  13 

Nescience,  63,  64 

Nigadas,  95 

Nihilism,  6,  7,  44,  45,  46-52 

Nilakantha,  97,  103,  104 

Nirnaya,  4 

Nisadasthapati,  103 

Nisedha,  93 

Niyama,  93,  98 

Niyoga,  75 

Non-existence,  34,  35,  52,  53,  60 

Non-perception,  34,  35,  60 

Number,  52,  68 

Nyaya,  meaning  of,  2,  107 

Nyaya  school,  14,  17-20,  22,  26, 

27,  29,  30,  32,  33,  34,  36,  40, 

55,  70 
Nydya  Siltra,  5,  14,  24,  29,  37  n., 

44,  46,  51 
Nyaya-VaiSesika     school,     14, 

23,  50,  52,  53,  56,  57,  58,  60, 

61,  63,  68,  69 
Nydyakanikd,  11 
Nydyamanjari,  14 
Nydyaratndkara,  10 
Nydyaratnamdld,  12 
Nydyasudhd,  10 
NydydvaUdldhiti,  12 
Nydyavdrttika,  14 

f^BJECTIVE  idealism,  52 
^     Ontology,  44-60 
Order  of  sacrifices,  90,  91 

DAIN,  54,  67,  68,  73 
*       Pancatantra,  5  n. 
Panini,  5  n. 
Pafisamkhya,  93,  98 
Parthasarathi  MiSra,  10,  11,  12, 

21,87 

Particularity,  52,  59 
Partnership,  105 
Paryudasa,  85,86,  94,  98 


INDEX 


111 


Perception,  22-27,  54,  63  ;  of 
motion,  56  ;  of  similarity,  59 

Phala,  27,  30 

Phalapurva,  75 

Pleasure,  54,  66,  67,  68,  73 

Plurality  of  souls,  71,  72 

Posteriority,  54,  55 

Potency,  32,  55 

Prabhacandra,  11 

Prabhakara,  9,  10,  14,  15,  17, 
19,  20,  22,  25,  27,  28,  30,  34, 
35,  39,  40,  41,  52,  53,  61,  64, 
69,  70,  71,  72,  74,  75,  79,  80, 
83,  85,  90 

Prakarana,  94,  99 

Prakaranapancika,  16 

Prakatya,  55 

Prama\  17 

Pramana,  27  ;  number  of .  35,  43 

Prameyapdrdyana,  9,  16,  55  n. 

Pranabhrt,  a  Nyaya,  99 

Prasanga,  96 

Prasastapada,  15,  27,  29,  30,  54, 
55,  60  n. 

Pratisedha,  85,  86 

Pratyabhijna,  17 

Presumption,  33,  34  ;  as  proof 
of  Apurva,  74 

Priority,  54,  55 

Purana,  authority  of,  82,  83, 107 

Purvapaksa,  3 

QUALITIES,  54,  55 

DAGHAVANANDA  Saras- 
*v    vati,  12 
Raghunandana,  99,  105 
Raghunatha,  13 
Ramakrsna,  12 
Ramakrsna     Udicya      Bhatta- 

carya, 13 

Ramanuja,  12,  46,  77 
RamesVara,  12 
Rdnaka,  10 
Rathakara,_92 

Ratnakara§anti,  idealism  of, 48n. 
Recognition,  17 
Remembrance,    17  ;      and    see 

Memory. 


Rumour,  as  a  Pramana,  43 
Rjuvimald,  9 

CABARASVAMIN,  7,  8,  9,  10, 
j?    39,  44,  64,  87,  88,  91 
Sabda,  as  form  of  absolute,  36 

n.  ;  and  see  Word. 
Sacrifices,  22,  73,  74,  76 
Saddarfanasamuccaya,  15 
S"alikanatha,  9,  17,  60  n.,  75 
Saman,  81 
Samantabhadra,  11 
Sambhava,  as  a  Pramana,  43 
Sarbgati,  4 

Samkara,  6,7,  9,  46,  76 
S"arhkara  Bhatta,  12,  98,  104 
Samkaravijaya,  11 
Sdmkhya  Sutra,  5,  36,  38,  64,  73. 
SarhSaya,  3 
Samudayapurva,  75 
Sdrirakabhdsya,  10 
SarvadarSanasamgraha,  15 
Sarvasiddhdntasamgraha,  9,  15 
^astra,  as  a  Pramana,  35,  41 
Sdstradipikd,  11,  12 
Sattras,  92 
Saunaka,  104 
Sautrantika,  49 
Self -consciousness,  20-22 
Self-evidence  of  cognitions,  17- 

20,  106  ;  and  see  Ideas. 
Senses,  23,  54,  55 
Sense  organs,  23,  67,  69 
Series  of  ideas,  49,  65,  66 
S"esa,87 

Segvaramimamsa,  14,  76 
Siddhanta,  4 

Similarity,  32,  33,  52,  58,  59 
Slokavdrttika,  10 
Smell,  54,  55 
Smrti,  82,  83,  107 
SomeSvara,  10 
Soul,  64-72 

Sound,  37,  38,  39,  53,  54 
Space,  53,  54,  55 
Sphota,  33 
Spirit ;  see  Soul. 
S*ridhara,  15,  54 
Subodhini,  12 
Substance,  53,  54 


112 


THE    KARMA-MlMAMSA 


Sucarita  Misra,  10 
Suddhiviveka,  103 
Sudra,  103 

Sunyavada,  6,  7,  44,  45,  46-52 
SureSvara,  11 
Svatahpramanya;  7 
Syena,  94 
Syllogism,  29,  30 

MANTRA,  95, 105 

•*•       Tantravarttika,  10 
Tdrkikaraksd ,  14 
Taste,  54,  55 
Tattvabindu,  11 
Tattvacintamani,  15 
Theism,  76  ;  and  see  God,  Dei 
ties. 

Time,  53.  54,  55 
Touch,  53,  54,  55 
Transcendental  perception,  27, 

28 

Transfer  of  ceremonies,  94,  95 
Transmigration,  65,  66 
Tuptikd,  10 

T  1DAYANA,  14,  32 

~     Uddyotakara,  9  n.,  14,  24 
Una,  94,  95 
Unseen  principle,  20 
Upakratnapardkrama,  13 
Upamana,  33,  34 
Upavarsa,  7,  8 
Utpattyapurva,  75 

WACASPATI   MiSra,    11,    14, 
v      15  n.,  24,  46 
Vaidyanatha,  12 
VaiSesika  school,  32,  35,  36,  42- 

66,  70,  73 
Vaifesika  Sutra,  5 
VaiSvadeva,  a  Nyaya,  104 
Vakyabheda,  82 
Validity  of  knowledge,  17-20  ; 

of  percegtion,  25,  26 
Vallabha  Acarya,  13 
Varadaraja,  14,  16 
Vdrttikdbharana,  10 
Varttikakara,  9 
Vasubandhu,  46 
Vatsyayana,  24,  46 


Venkatadhvarin,  14 

Venkafanatha,  VenkateSa,  10, 
76 

VenkateSvara  Diksita,  14 

Veda,  36,  42,  43,  63 

Vedanga,  83 

Vedanta  school,  36,  46,  63,  64, 
69,  70,  72 

Vedanta  Sutra,  5,  6,  7,  44,  46,  61, 
76,_77 

Vijnanavada,  5,  6,  7,  20,  22,  46- 
52  _ 

VijnaneSvara,  101 

Vidhi  ;  see  Injunction. 

Vidhirasayana,  12  ;  commen 
taries  on,  12 

Vidhitrayaparitrdna,   14 

Vidhiviveka,  11 

Vidyananda,  11 

Vikalpa,  96 

Vikrti,  2,  86 

Vindhyavasin,  59,  65 

Visaya,  3 

Viscidity,  55 

ViSvajit,  a  Nyaya,  87,  101 

Vrttikara,  7,  8,  20,  22,  27,  29, 
30,  32,  34,  35,  42,  88,  106 

Vyapti,  27 

Vyasa,  107 

Vyavahdramayukha,  101,  103 

Vyavasaya,  22,  50 

\Y7ATER,  53,  54 

vv  Whole  and  part,  50,  51; 
cf.  56-58 

Wife,  share  of  husband's  pro 
perty,  102 

Woman,  right  to  sacrifice,  91, 
92,  102 

Word,  or  verbal  testimony,  35- 
43 

GA,  86 

Yajnavalkya,  103,  106 
Yajus,  81 

Yuktisnehaprapuram,  12 
Yoga  Sutra,  5 
Yogdcdras,  47 

Yogins,  perception  of,  27  n., 
48 


- 


University  of  Toronto 
library 


DO  NOT 

REMOVE 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 


Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

Under  Pat.  "Ref.  Index  File" 
Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU